HP 382 Owner's Manual
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n HP 9000 Model 382 Owner's Guide for HP-UX Users HP 9000 Series 300 W orkstation Controllers ABCDE HP P art N o. A1473-90019 Printed in USA December 1992 Edition 2 E1292
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Notices Information in this do cumen t is sub ject to c hange without n otice. Hew lett-Packar d makes no warr anty of any kind ab out this manual, including, but not limite d to, t he implie d warr anties of mer chantability and îtness for a p articular purp ose. Hewlett-P ac k ard shall not b e liable for errors con tained herein or direct, indirect, sp ecial, inciden tal or consequen tial damages ab out the furnishing, p erformance, or use of this material. W arran t y. Please read the enclosed Hew l ett-Packar d S oftwar eP r o duct Lic ense A gr e ement and Limite d Warr anty b efore op erating this pro duct. Righ ts in the soft w are are oîered only on the condition that the customer accepts all terms and conditions of the License Agreemen t. Op er ating the pr o duct indic ates your ac c eptanc e of these terms and c onditions. If y ou do not agree to the License Agreemen t, y ou ma y return the un used pro duct for a full refund. A cop y of the sp eciîc w arran t y terms applicable to y our Hewlett-P ac k ard pro duct and replacemen t parts can b e obtained from y our lo cal Sales and Service Oîce. Cop yrigh t c î 1992 Hewlett-P ac k ard Compan y This do cumen t con tains information w hic hh a s be e n protected b yc o p yrigh t. All righ ts are reserv ed. Repro duction, adaptation, or translation without prior written p ermission i s p rohibited, except as allo w ed under t he cop yrigh tl a ws. Cop yrigh t c î A T&T, Inc. 1 980, 1984, 1986 Cop yrigh t c î The Regen ts of the Univ ersit y o f C alifornia 1979, 1980, 1983, 1985. This soft w are a nd do cumen tation is based in part on the F ourth Berk eley Soft w are Distribution u nder license from the Regen ts of the U niv ersit y of California.
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n R estricte d R ights L e gend Use, duplication or disclosure b y the United States Go v ernmen t is sub ject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) ( 1) (ii) o f the Righ ts in T ec hnical Data and Computer Soft w are clause at F ARs 52.227.7013. Hewlett-P ac k ard Compan y OSSD Learning Pro ducts 3404 East H armon y R oad F ort Collins, Colorado 80525
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Printing History New editions of this man ual incorp orate all material up dated since the previous edition. This man ual's prin ting date and part n um b er sho w its curren t edition. The prin ting date c hanges w hen an e w edition is prin ted. Minor c hanges ma y b e made at reprin t without c hanging the prin ting date. The man ual part n um b er c hanges when extensiv e tec hnical c hanges are i ncorp orated. Decem b er, 1992 Edition 2. This Edition includes material whic h app eared in the Mo del 382 and R/382 Owner's Guide (P/N A1473-90011) and the Mo del 382 Owner's Guide (P/N A1473-90014). New SAM, HP VUE, and device installation information h as b een added for HP-UX 9.0. Safety Symbols and Conv entions The follo wing con v en tions are used throughout this man ual: Note Notes con tain imp ortan t information set apart from the text. Caution Caution messages indicate pro cedures whic h, if not observ ed, could result in loss of data or damage to equipmen t. Do not pro ceed b ey ond a CA UTION message unless y ou fully understand and ha v e met the conditions stated therein. W arning W arning messages indicate procedures or practices which, if not observ ed, could result in personal injury . D o n ot proceed bey ond a W ARNING message unless y ou fully understand and ha v e met the c onditions stated therein. iv
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Regulatory Information F CC Statemen t (F or U.S.A. Only) The F ederal Comm unications Commission (in Subpart J of P art 15, Do c k et 20780) has sp eciîed that the follo wing notice b e b rough tt o the atten tion of the users o f this pro duct: This equipmen t g enerates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions man ual, ma y cause in terference to radio comm unications. It has b een tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuan t to Subpart J of P art 15 of F CC rules, whic h are designed to pro vide reasonable protection against suc hi n terference when op erated in a commercial en vironmen t. Op eration of this equipmen t in a r esiden tial area is lik ely to cause in terference in whic h case the user at his o wn exp ense will b e required to tak e whatev er measures ma y b e required to correct the in terference. T urv allisuusyh teen v eto (Finland Only) L aserturval lisuus Luok an 1 Laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP 9000 Mo del 382 tietok oneeseen v oidaan asen taa m uistilaitteeksi laitteensisî¿ ainen CD-R OM-levy asema, jok a on laserlaite. Tî¿ allî¿ oin m yî¿ os pî¿ aî¿ alaitteena toimiv a t ietok one k atsotaan laserlaitteeksi. Kyseinen CD-R OM-livy asema on kî¿ ayttî¿ ajî¿ an k annalta turv allinen luok an 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa kî¿ aytî¿ ossî¿ a levy aseman suo jak otelo estî¿ aî¿ a lasersî¿ ateen pî¿ aî¿ asyn laitteen ulk opuolelle. HP 9000 Mo del 382 tietok oneen o n t yyppih yvî¿ aksyn yt Suomessa laserturv allisuuden osalta T yî¿ osuo jeluhallitus, T yî¿ osuo jeluhallituksen h yvî¿ aksyn tî¿ an umero T SH 222/6019/90. Laitteiden turv allisuusluokk ao n mî¿ aî¿ aritett y v altioneuv oston pî¿ aî¿ atî¿ oksen N o: 472/1985 ja standardin SFS-IEC 825 m uk aisesti. Tiedot C D-R OM-levy asemassa kî¿ aytettî¿ avî¿ an laserdio din sî¿ ateily ominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 780 n m T eho 0,4 m W Luok an 1 laser v
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n V CCI Statement (Japan Only) vi
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Laser Safety Statement (For U.S.A. Only) (F or computers/con trollers with a CD R OM driv e installed.) The CD R OM driv ei s certiîed as a Class 1 laser pro duct under the U.S. Departmen t of Health and Human services (DHHS) Radiation P erformance Standard according to the R adiation Contr ol for H e alth and Safety A ct of 1968. This means that the device do es not pro duce hazardous laser radiation. Since laser ligh t emitted inside the device is completely conîned within protectiv e housings and external co v ers, the laser b eam cannot escap e from the mac hine during an y phase of user op eration. W arning Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures different from those specified in this manual ma y r esult in hazardous invisible laser radiation exposure. None of the mechanisms within the CD ROM driv e contain customer or field-replaceable parts. The CD ROM driv e becomes a Class 3B laser mechanism when disassembled. If the CD ROM driv e is disassembled, exposure to the invisible laser beam and hazardous invisible laser radiation could result in blindness. Do NOT disassemble the CD ROM driv e for any reason. vii
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Printing Conv entions This b o ok uses the follo wing t yp ographical con v en tions: If y ou see . . . It means . . . colored text User input. Activ ate the designated button, c ho ose the men u selection, or t yp e the text sho wn. F or example, more sample_file 4 Return 5 means y ou should t yp e the c haracters and press 4 Return 5 . computer text T ext displa y ed b y the c omputer system. F or example, login: indicates a login prompt displa y ed b y the system. italic text V ariable text supplied b y y ou. F or example, île n ame means that y ou t yp e a île name of y our c hoice. Italic text is also used for text emphasis and for do cumen t titles. 4 Key 5 T yp e the corresp onding k ey on the k eyb oard. F or example, 4 CTRL 5 - 4 D 5 means y ou hold do wn the 4 CTRL 5 k ey ,a n d press t he 4 D 5 k ey . N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N Displayed N N N N N NN NN NN N N Item Select an on-screen item or a corresp onding s oftk ey . F or example, N NN NN NN NN NN N N N Help viii
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Contents 1. Pro duct Description The HP 9000 Mo del 382 Con troller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 F eatures: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Built-In In terfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 In ternal Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Hardw are Arc hitecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Op erating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 2. Using Y our Man uals Ov erview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Finding Do cumen ts for Sp eciîc T asks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Hardw are I nstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Soft w are Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 System Op eration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 3. Starting Y our System Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Initially Conîguring Y our System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Using t he Command L ine to Log I n . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Setting U p a User Accoun t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Selecting a New P assw ord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Running the p asswd C ommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Exiting T emp orarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Exiting ( Logging O ut) for an Extended P erio d . . . . . . . 3-10 Exiting U sing the H P V UE F ron tP anel . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Contents-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Sh utting Do wn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Options for Y our Starting and W orking En vironmen t . . . . . 3-12 Activ ating the XW i n d o w S ystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Activ ating HP VUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Logging In and Using HP VUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Logging Out o f HP VUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 4. Using the Command Line Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 The Command L ine Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Running Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 W orking with Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Basics of Shells: Characteristics, Cho osing and U sing . . . . 4-3 Shell F eatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Determining Y our Login Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Using Key Shell: Visual Help for Korn Shell . . . . . . . . 4-6 Displa ying the HP-UX Man ual P ages from the Command Line 4-7 F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Using Files and Directories with Command Lines . . . . . . . 4-8 Creating Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Mo ving and Cop ying Files b et w een Directories . . . . . . . 4-9 Cop ying Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Remo ving Files and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Viewing and Prin ting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Prin ting a File with lp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Editing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Starting vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Selecting Editing F unctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 P ositioning the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Sa ving Y our W ork and Quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 F or More Information on vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Net w orking Ov erview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Cop ying Files Using ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Preparing t o Use ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 T ransferring F iles with ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Cop ying Files R emotely Using r cp . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Logging I n o n Another Computer Using rlogin . . . . . . . 4-23 Displa ying Remote Graphical P rograms L o c ally . . . . . . . 4-24 Contents-2
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 5. Bac king Up, Restoring, and Up dating Y our Soft w are Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Bac king Up Y our System and Soft w are . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Creating a Reco v ery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Bac king U p Y our File Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Restoring Individual Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Restoring Y our Op erating System Using the Reco v ery T ap e . . 5-10 F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 6. Conîguring HP-UX for Prin ters and Driv es Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Preparing f or Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Conîguring HP-UX for a Prin ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 T esting the Prin ter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Finding the Status of Existing SCSI Bus Addresses . . . . . . 6-7 Conîguring for a Hard Disk Driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Soft w are Installation of the Hard Disk Driv e Upgrade . . . . 6-8 T esting Y our Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Conîguring for a Flexible D isk Driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 T esting Y our Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Arc hiving Files to a Flexible Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Retrieving Files from a Flexible Disk . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Moun ting a New Flexible Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Remo ving and Inserting a File-System Flexible Disk . . . . . 6-17 Conîguring for a CD R OM Driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Installing the CD R OM Driv e with SAM . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 T esting Y our I nstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Moun ting the New CD R OM Driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Remo ving and Inserting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Conîguring f or a DDS T ap e D riv e . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Conîguring t he Driv e o n HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 T esting Y our I nstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 DDS T ap e D riv e L ED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Maxim u m Usage of DDS C assettes . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 In Case o f D iîcult y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Contents-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7. Dealing with Problems Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 In terpreting Error Messages During Bo ot . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 In terpreting the LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Dealing with HP VUE Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Logging In With HP VUE When All Else F ails . . . . . . . 7-8 Re-Setting the VRX Sp ecial Device Files with mkno d . . . . . 7-9 Managing a Bo ot F ailure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Bo ot Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Reco v ering from a System P anic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Pro cedures for Reco v ering from a System P anic . . . . . . . 7-16 Dealing with Net w ork F ailures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 A. Conîguring the Bo ot R OM App endix C on ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Using the Bo ot R OM Conîguration Mo de . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Mo difying I/O Conîguration Information . . . . . . . . . A-4 Conîguring for Automatic Op erating System Selection . . . . A-6 F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 Glossary Index Contents-4
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 1 Product Description The HP 9000 Model 382 Controller The HP 9000 Mo del 382 con troller is ob ject co de compatible with most earlier Series 300 and Series 400 computers. Man y capabilities of p ersonal computers ha v e b een implemen ted. Key features include a lo w-cost 22 MIPS p erformance and a v ersatile I/O set including serial and parallel in terface p orts. Optional in ternal mass storage devices include hard and îexible disk driv es and CD R OMs. V GA-resolution (640 b y 480) graphics are used. Monitors are also supp orted with 1024 b y 768 medium-resolution and 1280 b y 1024 high-resolution color graphics. Graphics resolution is determined b y the system b oard t yp e and conîguration. Features: MC 68040 CPU op erating at 25 MHz. ECC (SIMM) RAM conîgurable from 8 MB to 32 MB. Three graphics resolution v ersions: 1024 b y 768 medium-resolution; for 16-in. color monitors. 1280 b y 1024 high-resolution; for 19-in. color monitors. 640 b y 480 V GA-resolution graphics with 14-in. color or gra yscale monitors. 25-pin RS-232 serial I/O p ort (expandable to 3 p orts). One 25-pin HP P arallel p o rt. One H P-IB p ort. SCSI p o rt (optional). HP-HIL p o rt for H P-UX k eyb oards and other H P-HIL devices. DIO-I and DIO-I I i n terface s lot d irect c onnect expanders (optional in terface bo xes f or connecting additional c ards). DIO-I Accessory Card slot Product D escription 1-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Ethernet IEEE 802.3 LAN, in ternal jump er selectable for A UI LAN or ThinLAN (optional). The Mo del 382 accommo dates up to t w om a s s storage driv es. These include: One of the follo wing: 3.5-in îexible disk driv e. CD R OM disk driv e. The additional driv e can be selected from the f ollo wing: 52 Mb yte hard disk driv e (not supp orted on HP-UX). 210 Mb yte hard disk driv e. 420 Mb yte hard disk driv e. (The Mo del 382 will also accommo d ate hard disk driv es in b oth p ositions.) A t ypical system w ould also include the follo wing: Pro duct Description Con troller (computer) The system unit con taining a h ard disk driv e with pre-loaded op erating system, one accessory card slot, and optionally a îexible disk or CD R OM driv e. Keyb oard Connects to the con troller via the HP HIL connector and used for input to the system. Mouse Connects to the k eyb oard and used to mo v e the displa y cursor. Monitor Connects to the con troller system and displa ys resp onses on its screen. Bus expander (optional) Stac ks on top of the con troller and a ccepts additional a ccessory cards. (See Figure 1-3 ). Op erating systems: HP-UX, factory i nstalled, or installed f rom C D R OM or tap e. HP RMB/WS O S HP RMB/UX OS P ascal W orkstation 1-2 Product D escription
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Memory User-installable RAM b oards pro vide user RAM in incremen ts of 4, 8, and 16 Mb yte b lo c ks. They ha v e an Error Chec king and Correcting (ECC) abilit y . Standard RAM is 4 MB, expandable to 32 MB. RAM b oards are used in pairs. There are four so c k ets on the system b oard for t w o-b oard pairs. RAM Upgrades are a v ailable as follo ws: HP A2210A; t w o 2 Mb yte RAM b oards that add a 4-Mb yte blo c k of memory . HP A2201A; t w o4 Mb yte RAM b oards that add an 8-Mb yte blo c k of memory . HP A2202A; t w o 8M b yte RAM b oards that add a 16-Mb yte blo c k of memory . Graphics One of three system b oards is used in the Mo del 382 con troller. Eac h has diîeren t graphics circuitry . T able 1-1 lists the system b oards and their graphics features for supp orted external monitors. T able 1-1. Model 382 Controller Graphics Features System Board Resolution Refresh Rate Displa y RAM Memory Planes Supp orted Monitor Medium- Resolution 1024 b y 768 75 Hz 6 Mbits 8 HP A1497A/B Color High- Resolution 1280 b y 1024 72 Hz 16 Mbits 8 HP A1097A/B Color V GA 640 b y 480 60 Hz 4M b i t s 8 HP D1182 Color Eac h s ystem b oard has its o wn graphics R OM and sp eciîc g raphics c rystals to enable the diîeren t r efresh rates a nd color. Both color a nd gra yscale graphics, a s w ell as video, a re a v ailable a t t he 15-pin rear p anel video c onnector. Product D escription 1-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Figure 1-1. Model 382 Controller Front P anel Built-In Interfaces All the built-in in terfaces for the Mo del 382 ha v e their connectors on the rear panel as sho wn in Figure 1-2 . The illustration sho ws the optional external SCSI and LAN connectors. The status indicator LEDs are also visible through the rear panel. Figure 1-2. Model 3 82 Controller Rear P anel 1-4 Product D escription
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 The Mo del 382 can b e used with one or t w o optional expanders whic h serv e to increase the input/output capacit y of the con troller. Figure 1-3 sho ws ho wt w o expanders w ould ît on to it. Figure 1-3. Model 3 82 with T w o Expanders Product D escription 1-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Interface Descriptions The SCSI in terface uses a high-densit y , shielded external connector for use with external mass storage devices. In ternally , a ribb on cable connects t o optional mass storage devices. The RS-232 serial in terface is expandable from one p ort to three p orts. The graphics circuit pro vides video for monitors. A 25-pin HP P arallel p ort is pro vided for use with devices using the Cen tronics TM in terface proto cols. Some conîguration parameters are a v ailable under b o ot R OM con trol in Conîguration Mo de for in ternal in terfaces. The HP-HIL connector (rear panel) accepts a v ariet y of HP-HIL input devices. HP 46021B In tegrated T erminal F ormat (ITF) Keyb oard. Other HP-HIL devices ma y also b e connected to the k eyb oard or HP-HIL connector. An optional IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Lo cal Area Net w ork (LAN) is a v ailable to t w o p orts: ThinLAN uses the BNC connector. An in ternal attac hmen t unit i n terface is used. A UI LAN u ses the 15-pin connector. An external attac hmen t unit in terface is required for use on the net w ork. Either p ort is activ ated b y the system b oard LAN jump er p osition. Some LAN in terface v alues can b e conîgured b y k eyb oard e n try u nder Bo ot R OM con trol in Conîguration Mo de. As with other Series 300 computers and con trollers, audio tone output is pro vided, as w ell as an in ternal sp eak er. 1-6 Product D escription
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Internal Mass Storage Devices The Mo del 382 ma y use u p to t w o in ternal mass storage devices connected to the i n ternal SCSI in terface. It is a v ailable in diskless as w ell as disk ed conîgurations. Disk ed conîgurations for HP-UX ha v e their hard disk driv e ba y îtted with either a 210 or 420 Mb yte preformatted hard disk driv e. As an option, the HP-UX op erating system ma y b e preloaded. A second disk driv e ba y can ha v e one of sev eral optional mass storage devices installed. F actory-installed and customer-installable mass storage devices include: HP A2258A 210 Mb yte H ard Disk Driv e. HP A2259A 420 Mb yte Hard Disk Driv e. HP A2252A 3.5-in. Flexible Disk Driv e, whic h can b e moun ted on HP-UX, used with SoftPC TM , or used for île exc hange. HP A2253A CD R OM Disk Driv e, whic h pro vides access to sev eral data sets and m ulti-media applications, as w ell as to most HP soft w are. Hardw are Architecture Most of the functionalit y for the Mo del 3 82 is con tained on one system b oard. All in terface con trollers, CPU circuits, memory con troller and graphics/video circuits are on the system b oard. Either t w o or four RAM b oards plug in to so c k ets on the system b oard. Eac h mass storage device has its con troller circuits on a PC b oard that is part of the device. Separate assem blies include the optional LAN b oard, and the fan and p o w er supply assem blies. Product D escription 1-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Operating Systems HP-UX 9.0 is supp orted o n the M o del 382. It is pre-installed on disk ed HP-UX systems and includes HP VUE 3.0, whic h can b e activ ated after original b o ot. Users can start using the w orkstation immediately after hardw are installation. T able 1-2 lists the features and languages for the op erating system. T able 1-2. HP-UX Operating System and Languages for the Model 382 Op erating system: HP-UX 8.0 or later. HP-UX complies with X Op en, and POSIX sp eciîcations. Languages: ANSI/C, C , P ascal, HP-UX F OR TRAN/9000. User in terface: X Windo w System 11R5 (OSF/Motif 1.2), HP VUE 3.0, HP SharedX. Net w ork F eatures: IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Lo cal Area Net w ork: S.25. SNA. RJE. TCP-IP . HP Diskless. 1-8 Product D escription
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 2 2 Using Y our Manuals Ov erview This Owner's Guide co v ers the information y ou will need for getting started with using HP-UX on y our Mo del 382 con troller. The topics include logging in and using y our île system, editing îles, installing upgrade devices, and bac king up y our system and îles. In addition, Chapter 7 co v ers troublesho oting, if y ou should need it. Chapter Contents In this c hapter y ou will înd references to man uals for additional tasks related to installing, conîguring, and op erating the HP 9000 Mo del 382 and its asso ciated devices. F or troublesho oting information, please see Chapter 7. If y ou need help with system hardw are installation, see the Instal lation Guide for this system. If y ou do not ha v e a p re-installed (Instan t Ignition) system on y our disk and y ou need installation information, see Instal ling HP-UX 9.0 . If y ou ha v e installed y our system and w an t to get on with using it, skip to the second section o f Chapter 3 , \Using the Command Line to Log In" i n Chapter 3 . Using Y our M anuals 2-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 2 Finding Documents for Specific T asks This section describ es where to înd the information y ou ma y need to install and start using y our w orkstation. Hardw are Installation Installation of this Equipmen t Source Man ual Mo del 382, Keyb oard, Mouse, and Monitor. The Instal lation Guide for this system. LAN Upgrade. The HP A2255A LAN Interfac e Up gr ade Instal lation Guide Additional external p eripherals. The Instal lation Guide for the device and Instal ling Peripher als . DIO-I and DIO-I I Cards. ( Note that the DIO-II c ar d r e quir es an exp ander. ) The Instal lation Guide for the card and Instal ling Peripher als . CD R OM, H ard Disk, Flexible Disk driv es Chapter 6, in this man ual and the Instal lation Guide for the individual device. Net w ork connections. The Instal lation Guide for this system. 2-2 Using Y our Manuals
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 2 Softw are Installation Installation T ask Source Man ual Installing HP-UX. Instal ling a nd Up dating HP-UX 9.0 . Installing HP BASIC/UX. Instal ling and Maintaining HP BASIC/UX 6.2 . Installing HP BASIC/WS. Instal ling and Maintaining HP BASIC/WS 6.2 . Conîguring the Bo ot R OM. App endix A in this man ual and the Har dwar e Conîgur ation Guide for this system. Conîguring the LAN in terface. The Har dwar e Conîgur ation Guide for this system, the HP 9000 Series 300, 400 and 800 Computers Networking Overview ,a n d Instal l ing and A dministr ating LAN . En tering the system name and net w ork address. Chapter 3 and Chapter 7 in this man ual and the Instal lation Guide for this system. Creating new user accoun ts. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Setting or c hanging passw ords. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Setting p ermissions. Using HP-UX . Setting sw ap space. System A dministr ation T asks . Installing and using HP VUE. HP VUE User's Guide . Conîguring X Windo w s. Using the X Window System . Using Y our M anuals 2-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 2 System Operation Op eration Source Man ual Logging in and out of HP-UX. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Logging in and running BASIC/UX. Using HP BASIC/UX 6.2 . Logging in and running P ascal. Pasc al 3.2 User's Guide . Starting and running the X Windo w System. Using the X Window System . Sh utting do wn y our system. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Setting or c hanging passw ords. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Setting p ermissions. Using HP-UX . En tering commands in HP VUE. HP VUE User's Guide . En tering commands at a shell prompt (command line en try). Chapter 4 in this man ual, or Using HP-UX . Using the directory/île system in HP VUE. HP VUE User's Guide . Using the directory/île system with HP-UX commands. Chapter 4 in this man ual, or Using HP-UX . Using a shell. Chapter 4 in this man ual, Using HP-UX , or Shel ls: User's G uide . Viewing aî l e in HP VUE. HP VUE User's Guide . Viewing a île using HP-UX commands. Chapter 4 in this man ual. Editing a île. Chapter 4 in this man ual, Using HP-UX , or The Ultimate Guide to the vi and ex T ext Editors . Using basic net w ork services. Chapter 4 in this man ual, Using HP-UX , or Using Network Servic es . System bac kup/restoration. Chapter 5 in this man ual. System securit y . HP-UX System Se curity or Using HP-UX . Solving Problems F or tr oublesho oting c ommon p r oblems, se e C hapter 7 o r S olving HP-UX Pr oblems . 2-4 Using Y our Manuals
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 3 Starting Y our System Chapter Contents Initially Conîguring Y our System. Using the Command Line to Log In. Setting Up a User Accoun t. Selecting a New P assw ord. Logging Out. Sh utting Do wn. Options for Y our Starting and W orking En vironmen t. Starting Y our S ystem 3-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Initially Configuring Y our System If you have alr e ady lo ade d your HP-UX system and you have the \ login: " pr ompt on your scr e en, go on to the next p age. If y our system has HP-UX preloaded on its disk (this is indicated b y a lab el o v er the po w er switc h on y our con troller), HP-UX will automatically load itself when y ou îrst turn the p o w er on. During this pro cess, y ou will be ask ed for sev eral pieces of information needed to conîgure y our s ystem appropriately: The time zone where y our con troller is lo cated. The System name (host name) for y our w orkstation: an y alphan umeric, single-w ord name with eigh t or few er c haracters. The net w ork address n um b er, a lso called a n IP n um b er, for y our w orkstation. This consists of four address îelds separated b y p erio ds: for example, 255.32.3.10 . Y ou ma y need to consult with y our system administrator for this information. After y ou ha v e assem bled the hardw are for y our system, then ha v e the ab o v e information ready b efore y ou turn on the p o w er to y our con troller for the îrst time: 1. T urn o n the p o w er for y our con troller and displa y . 2. En ter the information when y our s ystem displa y requests it. If y ou do not ha v e the name, net w ork i.d., and time zone information when y ou are prompted for it, y ou can use the default v alues no w and e n ter t his information a t another time. Y ou w ould en ter the information later b y t yping: /etc/set_parms systemname The displa y will then prompt y ou for a n y information whic h is missing or whic hy ou ma y n eed t o r e-en ter. T o review the steps of the b o o t pro cess in detail, see the Instal lation Guide for this pro duct. 3-2 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Using the Command Line to Log In T o log in the first time: 1. T yp e root at the \ login: " prompt. 2. Press 4 Return 5 . Since y ou ha v en't y et set a passw ord, y ou will get a a system prompt ( # for root ), and y ou can b egin using the system. T o protect y our data, do the follo wing as so on as p ossible: a. Set up a passw ord for root . See the section \Selecting a P assw ord," later in this c hapter. b. Set up a \user" accoun t. A user accoun t pro vides the login en vironmen t for doing o rdinary tasks with y our system, while protecting y ou from acciden tally c hanging or erasing critical op erating system îles. See \Setting Up a User Accoun t", later in this c hapter to set up a user accoun t. c. Set up a passw ord for y our user accoun t. Note If y ou ha v e additional (non-ro ot) in ternal disk devices for y our île systems, or if y ou ha v e a DDS-F ormat (D A T) driv e, y ou will need to b e sure they are conîgured o n HP-UX b efore y ou can access them. If y ou ha v e a factory-installed ro ot disk with Instan t I gnition (pre-installed HP-UX), t he device îles for an y other included devices will already b ei n /dev . Y ou will need to conîgure sw ap or île systems for additional hard disk driv es, according to y our needs, and then moun t them. Use the SAM (System Administration Manager) to do this, b y follo wing the pro cedure in \Conîguring for aH a r d Disk Driv e" in Chapter 6. Or see the Instal l ation G uide for y our device(s) for t he details of the SAM p ro cedures. Starting Y our S ystem 3-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 After y ou log in the îrst time as root , the default lo cal login script prompts y ou to en ter y our terminal t yp e as follo ws. Y ou can r esp ond b y pressing y or n 4 Return 5 . Is your console one of the following: a 2392A, 2393A, 2397A, or 700/92? [y/n]: If y ou resp ond n (or 4 Return 5 ), y ou will see a ro w of n um b ers whic h asks y ou to determine the width (in columns) of y our screen. Resp ond b y en tering the largest n um b er y ou can see on the righ t (\128" is t ypical). If y ou are using a V GA displa y , en ter the largest n um b er y ou can see on the righ t of the îrst l ine . Similarly , y ou will see a displa y of n um b ered ro ws. Y ou will b e ask ed to determine the ro w with the largest n um b er, in the upp e r left. Resp ond b y en tering the largest n um b er y ou see (\49" is t ypical). The system resp onds with a n um be r (suc h as \300h") whic h indicates the TERM setting for this session. T o Log In Later a s User Y ou will use the pro cedure in the next section to set up a user accoun t. Then, when y ou log in as user name ,y our system displa ys the follo wing during login: TERM = ( hp) Pressing 4 Return 5 sets the TERM en vironmen t v ariable to \ hp ", the d efault v alue. Generally , this is all y ou will need to do, since \ hp " deînes appropriate format v alues for Hewlett-P ac k ard t erminals. 3-4 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Setting Up a User Account Y our can use SAM (System Administration Manager), to add a new user accoun t. If y ou aren't already logged in as root , t yp e exit 4 Return 5 and log in as root . (Y ou will see the # shell prompt whenev er y ou are root ). T o start SAM: 1. As root , t yp e /usr/bin/sam 4 Return 5 . The SAM op ening men u w ill app e ar. T o run Sam on ac haracter t erminal (without a mouse), use the 4 8 5 and 4 9 5 k eys to mo v e the selection highligh t up and do wn the men us (\select"), and press 4 Return 5 to \c ho ose" a highligh ted selection. Use function k eys to activ ate c hoices in the (top) men u bar, to get help or for other functions. Use 4 T ab 5 to activ ate other men u areas. When t yping, use the 4 6 5 and 4 7 5 k eys, 4 Backspace 5 , and 4 Delete cha r 5 for correcting mistak es. 2. A t the op ening men u, c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N Users and Groups-> b y highligh ting it, follo w ed b y pressing 4 Return 5 or selecting N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Open . 3. A t the next screen, c ho ose N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N Users . After a pause, y ou will see a screen displa ying a list of logins and real names. 4. Select N N N N N N N N N NN Add from the N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N Actions men u on the men u bar. On a c haracter terminal, use the N N N NN NN N f4 function k ey to activ ate the men u bar selections, and use the arro w k eys to mo v e to the one y ou w an t. Y ou will see a form N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Add a U ser Account . Starting Y our S ystem 3-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 5. Fill in y our l ogin name, c hoice of start-up program and en vironmen t, if diîeren t from the defaults giv en. Supply the optional information as needed. Note On this form y ou can select the X Windo w System as y our login default en vironmen t, if y ou so desire. 6. Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK (clic k on it, or press 4 Return 5 with N N N N N N N N OK illuminated) when y ou are înished. 7. Y ou will b e ask ed to select a passw ord. (See \Selecting a New P assw ord" for passw ord requiremen ts. If y ou wish, y ou can select a temp orary passw ord and reset i t later). T yp e the passw ord and press 4 Return 5 . R e-en ter the passw ord, as requested. The re-en tered passw ord m ust matc h the î rst. 8. Activ ate N N N NN NN N OK 9. When the \T ask Completed" m essage app ears, activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . 10. In the N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Users and Groups screen, select N N N N N N NN NN N N N N Exit from the N N N N N N NN NN N N N N List men u (or double-clic k on the N N NN N - in the upp er-left corner), if y ou are using a mouse. 11. Cho ose the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N Exit SAM function k ey . 12. T yp e exit at the # prompt to log out of root . 3-6 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Selecting a New P assw ord After y ou ha v e set up a user accoun t and passw ord, y ou ma y w an tt o c hange passw ords at a later time for securit y reasons. Cho ose y our new passw ord according to these rules: The p assw ord m ust c on tain b et w een six and eigh t c haracters. A t least t w o c haracters m ust b e letters (upp ercase or lo w ercase). A t least one c haracter m ust b e either of the follo wing: Numeric (the digits 0 through 9 ). Sp ecial (neither letters nor n umeric|for example, - , _ , or $ ). According to these rules, the follo wing are all v alid passw ords: foo-bar $money$ Number_9 @rophy Also, upp ercase and lo w ercase letters are diîeren t. Th us, these a re all diîeren t: foo-bar Foo-Bar FOO-BAR When y ou c ho ose a passw ord, y ou w an t to ensure that no one can guess what y ou c hose. If someone kno ws y our passw ord, that p erson ma y log in and access y our îles. Starting Y our S ystem 3-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Running the passwd Command When y ou'v e c hosen y our new passw ord, set it b y running passwd : $ passwd After y ou'v e en tered the passwd command, the program leads y ou through these steps: 1. If y ou don't ha v ea passw ord, skip this step. If y ou do ha v e a passw ord, passwd prompts y ou to en ter it. Changing password for leslie Y our username app e ars her e. Old password: invisible old p asswor d Enter your curr ent p asswor d. 2. When y ou see the follo wing p rompt, en ter y our new passw ord. (The screen will not ec ho what y ou t yp e.) New password: invisible p asswor d 3. Next, y ou need to re-en ter the new passw ord to v erify i t: Re-enter your new password: invisible p asswor d No w, when y ou log in again, use y our n ew passw ord. 3-8 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Logging Out Caution If y our system h as its o wn disk and y ou are logged in on y our lo cal op erating system, do not turn oî p o w er to y our system without îrst sh utting do wn its soft w are according t o the pro cedure in this c hapter, \ Sh utting Do wn". T urning oî the p o w er without îrst doing the sh utdo wn pro cedure ma y result in damage to data on y our disk. If y ou are running y our system as a no de in a cluster, and y ou ha v e a moun ted lo cal île system disk, y ou m ust also p erform the pro c edure in \Sh utting Do wn", o r ha v e y our system administrator do so. Using the command line (shell prompt), y ou can use either the lock command to secure y our screen for temp orarily lea ving y our w orkstation (and lea v e pro cesses running), or y ou can log out of y our curren t w ork session en tirely . The follo wing pro cedures explain lock and exit . Corresp onding actions can b e tak en on the HP VUE F ron t P anel. Starting Y our S ystem 3-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Exiting T emporarily If y ou w an t to lea v e y our w orkstation for a short time without logging out, en ter the follo wing: lock Y ou will b e ask ed to en ter a passw ord, whic h will not b ed i s p l a y ed: Key: invisible p asswor d Again: invisible p asswor d LOCKED No w the k eyb oard cannot be used un til y ou en ter the passw ord to unlo c k the system. Exiting (Logging Out) for an Extended P eriod The most common w a y to log out from the command line is b y using the exit command: $ exit Exiting Using the HP VUE Front P anel If y ou c ho ose to run HP VUE (see \Activ ating HP VUE"), y ou can lo c k y our screen temp orarily b y c lic king on the l o c k icon (an icon of a padlo c k) on the lo w er left. T o log out using HP VUE, y ou can clic ko n the \Exit" icon at the lo w er righ t. See HP VUE User's Guide for further information. 3-10 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Shutting Do wn Caution T urning oî the p o w er for y our con troller without îrst doing the sh utdo wn pro cedure ma y result in damage to data on y our disk. Alw a ys execute shutdown to completion îrst. T o sh ut do wn using the command line: 1. Log in as root Y ou can run shutdown without b eing root b y b eing listed in the île /etc/shutdown.allow . See System A dministr ation T asks for details. 2. En ter the follo wing: shutdown -h The -h option will cause the system to halt. Y ou or an y one net w ork ed to y our system will ha v e a grace p erio d of one min ute to stop pro cesses and sa v e w ork b efore the system halts. (Use shutdown -h 0 , if y ou w an t y our system to stop immediately). Y ou can then turn oî the p o w er when a message conîrms that it is safe to do so. Note En tering shutdown with no option will cause the system to halt after one min ute and reb o ot in single user state. It is not safe to your disk data to turn oî the p ower with the system running . If y our system runs a clustered net w ork, en tering shutdown -h also causes a message to be broadcast to net w ork ed users: SYSTEM BEING BROUGHT D OWN IN ONE MINUTE 3. Y ou will see a question: Do you want t o continue? (y/n) a. If y ou press n and 4 Return 5 ,y our w orkstation w ill not sh ut do wn. b. If y ou press y and 4 Return 5 ,t h e s h utdo wn pro cess starts. W ait for m essage: Halted, you may now cycle p ower. 4. Y ou can n o w safely turn oî the p o w er for y our con troller. Starting Y our System 3-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Options for Y our Starting and W orking Environment Y our HP-UX con tains the îlesets to run either the X Windo w System or HP VUE (Visual User En vironmen t). T o run either the X Windo w System or HP VUE, y ou will need: More than 12 MB of memory in y our Mo del 382. A t least a 1024 b y 768 resolution monitor (color or gra yscale). Activ ating the X Windo w System If y ou wish to run just the X Windo w System, without using the HP VUE île managemen t features, y ou can select it as y our login default en vironmen t when y ou create y our new user accoun t. If y ou w an t to log in with the X Windo w System for the curren t session only , en ter the follo wing: x11start This will cause the X Windo w System to run, with system default settings, for the curren tl o g i n session. T o c hange y our startup en vironmen t to run the X Windo w System at eac h login, use SAM to mak e this c hange in y our user accoun t. See \Setting Up a User Accoun t", in this c hapter. F or information on using the X Windo w System, see Using X Windows . 3-12 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 d a c b Typical HP VUE W orkspace Activ ating HP VUE Before y ou activ ate HP VUE, îrst c hec k that y our system fulîlls the follo wing conditions in addition to those already giv en: The s ystem hostname is listed in /etc/hosts . It has a console-based graphics displa y (at least 1024 b y 768 resolution). It is able to run the X W indo w system. If y our I GNITION îleset is installed, y ou m ust run a s cript t o c omplete the conîguration o f t he Instan t I gnition t o ols. The s cript will edit /etc/inittab (if i t h as not b een extensiv ely customized) and /etc/newconfig/inittab to launc h H P V UE. I t a lso registers the IGNITION to ols s o t hat t hey are recognized b yH P VUE. Starting Y our System 3-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 On a diskless cluster, this script m ust b e run on eac h cno de that will run HP VUE and the Instan t Ignition to ols. 1. Log in as root . 2. T o run the script, t yp e : /etc/newconfig/Ignition/configure.sh The script will prin t out a success or failure message. If the script is successful, go on with the next section. If a failure o ccurs, see the section \Dealing with HP VUE Problems" in Chapter 7. V erifying Proper Operation Once the installation of the IGNITION îleset has b een completed and the configure.sh script has b een run, y ou can start HP VUE b y using t he follo wing metho d: Reb o ot y our system T yp e telinit 4; exit The HP VUE login screen should app ear; if it do es not, see Chapter 7. Logging In and Using HP VUE T o login: 1. Use the HP VUE login screen to log in as root . 2. During the l ogin pro cess, if y ou need help logging in, clic k on the login screen N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Help button. 3. Y our screen after login w ill h a v e a sligh tly d iîeren t a pp earance the î rst time y ou log in. Y ou will see a NNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Welcome windo w d ispla y ed along w ith t he HP VUE F ron tP anel, t he îrst time y ou log i n. The information i n t he NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN Welcome windo w w ill h elp y ou explore the c apabilities o f y our system and p e rform some basic tasks. 3-14 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 4. When y ou log in to HP VUE for subsequen t sessions, y ou will see the F ron t P anel and the File Manager windo w for y our home directory . Y ou can still clic k on the N NN NN ? on the F ron t P anel to get help information or the N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Welcome windo w information. 5. T o get a terminal windo w with a shell prompt, clic k on the T erminal con trol button (a picture of a monitor and k eyb oard) on the F ron t P anel. The HP VUE T erminal Button 6. T o temp orarily lo c k y our screen, clic k on the Lo c k icon (a picture of a padlo c k) on the F ron t P anel. Figure 3-1. The Lock Button Logging Out of HP VUE T o log out of a session, close y our c urren tî l e s and clic k on the logout con trol on the F ron t P anel. The L ogout C ontrol 1 î Starting Y our System 3-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 For More Information T o înd out more ab out conîguring and using HP VUE and the X Windo w System, see the HP VUE User's Guide and Using the X Window System 3-16 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 4 Using the Command Line Chapter Contents The Command Line Prompt. W orking with Shells. Using Files and Directories with Command Lines. Viewing and Prin ting Files. Editing Files. Net w orking Ov erview. Using t he Command Line 4-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 The Command Line Prompt Whenev er y ou see the command line prompt, y ou can b egin t yping commands. If y ou are logged in as user , the command line prompt is either $ or % , dep ending on y our shell. H P-UX displa ys the prompt ev ery time y ou press 4 Return 5 . Running Commands T o run a command, t yp e the command's name after the prompt and press 4 Return 5 . The command then will b egin running. When the command înishes, the prompt reapp ears. F or example, run the follo wing whoami command no w: $ whoami 4 Return 5 leslie Y our user name app e ars her e. $ Then the c ommand line pr ompt r e app e ars. If y ou mak e a mistak e when t yping a command, use the 4 Back space 5 k ey to bac k up and correct it. (T o mak e e xamples as clear as p ossible, this man ual will not sho w the 4 Return 5 k ey at the end of eac h command line.) 4-2 Using the C ommand L ine
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 W orking with Shells Whenev er y ou en ter a command y ou are making use of a command in terpreter whic h in terprets that command for HP-UX. The command in terpreter is called a shell . When y ou log in, y ou are said to b e \in" a shell . HP-UX supp orts sev eral diîeren t shells whic h b eha v e in sligh tly diîeren t w a ys and giv e y ou v arying amoun ts of in teractiv e supp ort at y our displa y . These are called the Bourne, Korn, P osix, Key , and C Shells. The en vironmen t y ou select when y ou set up y our user accoun t determines whic h shell y ou get when y ou îrst log in, and y ou ha v e the option of c hanging shells later. Basics of Shells: Characteristics, Choosing and Using HP-UX giv es y ou y our c hoice of sev eral diîeren t shell-t yp es whic h y ou can run: the Bourne, Korn, P osix, Key , and C Shells. Eac h of these shells has diîeren t c haracteristics, and y ou can increase the sp eed and eîciency with whic h y ou in teract with HP-UX inside windo ws if y ou learn to use s ome of the built-in features of the shell of y our c hoice. F or details on shell features and b eha vior, p lease see the Using HP-UX and the Shel ls: User's Guide . Using t he Command Line 4-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Shell Features Belo w are listed some of the features whic h ma y help y ou mak e a decision on whic h s hell w ould b e b est for the kind of w ork y ou are doing: T able 4-1. Comparison of Shell Features F eatures Description Bourne P osix Korn Key C Command history A feature allo wing commands to b e stored in a buîer, then mo diîed and reused. No Y es Y es Line editing The abilit y to mo dify the curren to r previous command lines with a text editor. No Y es No File name completion The abilit y to automatically înish t yping î le names in command lines. No Y es Y es alias command A feature allo wing users to rename commands, automatically include command options, or abbreviate long command lines. No Y es Y es Restricted shells A securit y feature pro viding a con trolled en vironmen t with limited capabilities. Y es Y es (Not Posix Shel l) No Job con trol T o ols for t rac king and accessing p ro cesses that run i n the b ac kground. See Shel ls: User's Guide No Y es Y es 4-4 Using the C ommand L ine
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Determining Y our Login Shell The command echo $SHELL displa ys the î le name o f the s hell y ou en tered when y ou logged in. $e c h o $SHELL /bin/sh $ T emporarily Changing Y our Shell Unless y ou are in a restricted shell, y ou can temp orarily c hange y our shell b y using this command: shel l name where shel l name is the name of the shell (for example, sh , ksh , or keysh ). T emp orarily c hanging y our shell lets y ou exp erimen t in other shells. By t yping the name of the shell y ou w an t to run, y ou invoke (en ter) that shell, and the correct prompt is displa y ed. After exp erimen ting in the new shell, return to y our original shell b y t yping either exit or 4 CTRL 5 - 4 D 5 . P ermanently Changing Y our Shell T op ermanen tly c hange y our lo gin shel l (the default shell y ou get when y ou log in), use the chsh ch ange sh ell) command: chsh username shel l p ath name where username is y our u ser name and shel l p ath name is the full path name (e.g., /bin/ksh ) of the shell y ou w an t as y our d efault. After y ou use the chsh command, y ou m ust log out and log in again for the c hange to tak e eîect. F or example, if terry c hanges the default login shell to the Korn Shell, the command r eads: $ c hsh terry /bin/ksh $ Using t he Command Line 4-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Using Key Shell: Visual Help for Korn Shell Key Shell giv es y ou help on most HP-UX commands i n Korn Shell b y displa ying s oftk ey command-names and options in sequence. Y ou can select from these and let Key Shell build y our command lines \in E nglish" b efore y ou ha v e m astered the commands and command syn tax of HP-UX. Key Shell giv es y ou softk ey displa ys at the b ottom of y our screen whic h pro vide a \men u" of basic Korn Shell commands, along with their options in sequence. Y ou will îrst see a status l ine lik e the follo wing Figure 4-1. Key Shell Softk ey Displa y Y ou can en ter commands from the Key Shell softk ey men u or y ou can en ter standard HP-UX commands as usual. If y ou en ter standard HP-UX commands, Key Shell will often displa y an appropriate left-to-righ t set of men u options in the softk ey lab el area at the b ottom of y our screen. Eac h lab el corresp onds to a softk ey , N N N N N N N N f1 through N N N N N N N N f8 . The N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N hpterm at the cen ter separates the softk eys in to groups of four. Y ou ma y select an y or none of the options successiv ely b y pressing the corresp onding softk ey . When y ou w an t to see more commands, or more options to go with a command y ou'v e already c hosen, press the NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N --More-- softk ey , NN NN N N N N f8 . This will cause the Key Shell to displa y the next \bank" of softk eys in sequence, ev en tually cycling bac k to the îrst, if y ou press NN NN NN NN f8 rep eatedly . After y ou mak e a selection b y pressing a softk ey ,y our c hoice w ill app ear o n t he command l ine i n \ English," just as it app eared in the s oftk ey displa y , with t he correct order a nd spacing. 4-6 Using the C ommand L ine
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Displa ying the HP-UX Manual P ages from the Command Line T yp e man c ommand name at the command prompt. F or example, to learn more ab out the cp command t yp e: $m a n cp After a few seconds, an information displa y app ears. The message - More -(11%) means y ou'v e view ed 11% of the île, and 8 9% remains. (Some systems will just displa y - More - ). A t this p oin t, y ou can do an y of the follo wing: Step through the île a page at a time b y pressing the space bar. Scroll through the île a line a t a time b y pressing 4 Return 5 . Quit viewing the reference page b y pressing 4 q 5 . T o prin t a man page for a command named c ommand , en ter the follo wing: man c ommand | col -b |l p Y ou can use the man command to get a complete listing of HP-UX man uals b y en tering: man manuals For More Information Y our shell has man y pro ductivit y-enhancing capabilities y ou ma y înd useful. T o learn ab out shells in detail, also refer to Using HP-UX and to Shel ls: User's Guide . Using t he Command Line 4-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Using Files and Directories with Command Lines The follo wing giv es y ou some basic information on using the HP-UX directory system. If y ou need more information on using îles, directories, and command lines, see Using HP-UX . Creating Directories The mkdir (mak e directory) command creates a new directory . After y ou create a directory , y ou can mo v e îles in to it, and y ou can ev en create more directories underneath it. F or example, to create a sub-directory in y our curren t w orking directory n amed projects , t yp e: $ mkdir projects T o v erify that it w ork ed, y ou can use either the ls or lsf command. Both commands displa y the new directory , but lsf app ends a slash ( / ) to the end of directory names to diîeren tiate them from île names. F or example: $ ls List îles, dir e ctories in your curr ent working dir e ctory. myfile projects It worke d! $ lsf myfile projects/ The lsf c ommand app ends a slash to dir e ctory names. Figure 4-2 sho ws the resulting directory structure. Figure 4-2. Creating t he \projects" Directory The general form o f the mkdir command is as follo w s: mkdir new dir p ath where new d ir p ath is the p ath name of the d irectory y ou w an t t o c reate. 4-8 Using the C ommand L ine
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Mo ving and Cop ying Files b etw een D irectories The mv command can be used to mo v e î les from one îlename to another or from one d irectory to another. F or example, to mo v e myfile in to the projects directory , t yp e: $ cd Move to your home dir e ctory îrst. $ mv myfile projects The general form of the mv command is as follo ws: mv fr om p ath to p ath where fr om p ath is the île n ame or path name of the île y ou w an t to mo v e, and to p ath is the name of the path where y ou are m o ving the île. Cop ying Files T o cop y a île in to a diîeren t directory , use the cp command. F or example, to mak e a cop y of myfile named myfile2 in the projects directory , t yp e: $ cp myfile projects/myfile2 T o mak e a new v ersion of myfile2 named myfile3 in y our curren t directory , t yp e: $ cp projects/myfile2 myfile3 The general form of the cp command is as follo ws: cp fr om p ath to p ath where fr om p ath is the île name or path name of the île y ou w an tt o cop y , and to p ath is the path name of the directory or île to whic h y ou are cop ying. Caution If y ou cop y a île t o a directory ,e v en if the directory h as the same name as the î le, t he directory will not b e d estro y ed. B ut a île of the s ame n ame in that directory w ould b e . As a g eneral rule, b efore u sing mv or cp ,u s e ls or lsf to ensure that the target île n ame to whic hy ou w an tt o m o v eo r cop y d o e sn't already exist. Using the C ommand Line 4-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Remo ving Files and Directories If y ou ha v e îles that are n o longer needed, y ou should remo v e (delete) them. Deleting unnecessary îles lea v es more ro om on y our system. F or example, supp ose y ou'v e înished using myfile2 , and it is no longer n eeded. T o remo v e myfile2 , t yp e: $ rm myfile2 T o remo v ea n empty directory , t yp e the follo wing: rmdir dirname If there are an y visible or in visible (\dot") îles still in the directory , this command will not b e e xecuted, and y ou will get a message that the directory is not empt y . Also, if there are a n ys u b directories in the directory , y ou will get a message. In either case y ou can do the follo wing: cd dirname rm * ll -a A ny invisible \dot" îlenames r emaining wil l b e displaye d. rm .îlenames Y ou may have to r ep e at this c ommand for al ld o t îles. rmdir * This r emoves any empty sub dir e ctories. cd .. T o get to the p ar ent d ir e ctory again. rm dirname 4-10 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 T o a v oid this pro cess and remo v e a directory and al l its îles and dir e ctories in one action, t yp e the follo wing: rm -rf dirname Caution Use rm -rf with great caution, since it do es remo v e a directory and a ll its c on ten ts, irretriev ably , in one action. Using the C ommand Line 4-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Viewing and Printing Files The more command displa ys a text île's con ten ts on the screen. F or example, the follo wing line displa ys the con ten ts of myfile : $ more myfile This is the text of "myfile", which I had previously entered. $ If the île con tains more lines than are on y our screen, more pauses when the screen is full. With a longer île, y ou can press 4 space 5 to con tin ue lo oking at additional screens, and press 4 q 5 when y ou are înished. Then more returns y ou to the system prompt. F or using the vi text editor, see \Editing Files", in this c hapter. Printing a File with lp If y our system is appropriately conîgured, y ou can prin t a t ext île using the lp ( l ine p rin ter) command. Before using the lp command y ou ma y need to înd out whether y our system is set up so that y ou can use the lp command. If it is not, basic installation information is in Chapter 6, in this man ual. Y ou can înd detailed information on installing and conîguring prin ters in System A dministr ation T asks . If lp do es w ork on y our system, y ou ma y also n eed to înd out the lo cation of the prin ter, on an extensiv e system. When y ou ha v e this information, prin t myfile b y running t he lp command: $ lp myfile 4-12 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 If the lp command is w orking prop erly , it should displa y a message indicating that it sen t y our île to the prin ter. F or example: request id is lp- numb er (1 file) The numb er is an i.d. n um be r assigned to the prin t job b y the lp command. If y ou don't see this message, or if y ou get an error message, consult y our system administrator. If lp w orks successfully , y ou should g et a p rin tout with y our username displa y ed on the îrst page. The time required for a prin tout dep ends on the n um b er of tasks b eing run b y the system a nd the s p eed o f the prin ter. T o displa y a rep ort on the prin ter status, including the order of y our prin t job in the p rin ter q ueue, t yp e: $ lpstat -t T o c ancel a prin t job, en ter the cancel command, with the i.d. n um b er for y our job: $ cancel r e quest id Using the C ommand Line 4-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Editing Files Y ou can use the in teractiv e text editor vi to enable y ou to view and alter text îles, as w ell as to create new ones. This section in tro d uces the b asics of using vi .F or detailed information, s ee The U ltimate Guide to the vi and ex T ext Editors . Starting vi Start vi b y en tering the command vi îlename at the prompt. If a île called îlename exists, y ou will see the îrst screen of that île. If the île do es not exist, it is created, a nd y ou will see a blank screen. Selecting Editing Functions The vi editor has sev eral functional mo des. When y ou en ter vi y ou are in command mo de and it is in this mo de that y ou select all editing functions. Y our selection determines what y ou can do to the text. Press 4 ESC 5 to ensure that vi is in command mo de. Then y ou can execute an y of the follo wing commands (among others): i (the insert command) Places y our île in text mo de and en ters whatev er y ou t yp e preceding the cursor. Ev erything after the cursor will b e mo v ed to the r igh t. a (the app end command) Places y our île in text mo de and en ters whatev er y ou t yp e after the cursor. The cursor mo v es to the righ t, and then text is inserted as with i . x (the delete command) Deletes the c haracter t hat is highligh ted b y the cursor. This command do es not put y our d o cumen t in text mo de. Eac h command in command m o d e a llo w s y ou to p erform only that function. F or example, if y ou place y our île in text mo de b yt yping r (\replace a single c haracter" command), t hen y ou ma y o nly r eplace o ne c haracter. Y ou are then placed in command mo de, a nd y ou can return to text mo de b yt yping i or a b efore inserting t ext. 4-14 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 P ositioning the Cursor The most commonly-used metho dt o mo v et h e cursor i s to use the h , j , k , and l k eys. Y ou can also use the arro w k eys. These k eys mo v e the cursor as follo ws (press 4 ESC 5 îrst for command mo de): T able 4-2. T o Do This . . . T yp e This Command . . . Mo v e the c ursor righ t. l or 4 7 5 Mo v e the cursor left. h or 4 6 5 Mo v e the cursor up. k or 4 8 5 Mo v e the cursor do wn. j or 4 9 5 Sa ving Y our W ork and Quitting Y ou can sa v e y our w ork with or without quitting vi . Y our do cumen t m ust b e in command mo de for y ou to b e able to use the follo wing commands to sa v e y our w ork. Press 4 ESC 5 to ensure that y our do cumen t is in command mo de: T able 4-3. T o Do This . . . T yp e This Command . . . Sa v e w ithout quitting vi :w Sa v e and quit vi :wq Quit vi without sa ving c hanges :q! Sa v e u nder another île n ame :w îlename Sa v e i n a n e xisting île and o v erwrite t hat î le :w! îlename Using the C ommand Line 4-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 For More Information on vi The vi text editor comprises man ym o r e functions than are d escrib ed in this brief in tro duction. Refer to Using HP-UX or The Ultimate Guide to the vi and ex T ext Editors for more complete information ab out vi . 4-16 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Netw orking Ov erview Y our HP-UX system can use a v ariet y of net w orking services to enable y ou to transfer copies of îles to or from other computer systems. These s ervices can also enable y ou to log o n to remote mac hines on the net w ork and run commands and pro cesses remotely . This section giv es y ou basic pro cedures for using the follo wing net w orking functions: Cop ying îles to and from a remote computer: ftp . Cop ying îles remotely: rcp . Logging on to another c omputer on the net w ork: rlogin . Displa ying remote graphics programs lo cally . F or information on using HP-VUE on remote systems, NFS-moun ting remote île systems, and exp orting île systems to remote systems, see Using HP-UX , HP VUE User's Guide , or Using Network Servic es . Using the C ommand Line 4-17
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Cop ying Files Using ftp The ftp île transfer program allo ws y ou to cop y îles b et w een y our lo cal system and r emote systems and among remote HP-UX, UNIX, and non-UNIX net w ork hosts that supp ort ARP A services. The ftp program not o nly allo ws y ou to p erform remote île cop ying , but also facilitates île managemen t op erations suc h as c hanging, listing, creating, and deleting directories on a remote system for whic h y ou ha v ea v alid login or accoun t. Using ftp y ou can cop ya lo cal île to a remote île or vice v ersa. Y ou can also app end a lo cal île to the end of a remote île. The île to whic h y ou are cop ying can ha v e either the same or a diîeren t directory path and/or name as the one o n the originating system. Preparing to Use ftp Mak e sure that y our /etc/hosts île c on tains en tries for the remote hosts with whic h y ou will comm unicate. Ha v e the system administrators for the remote hosts arrange to giv e y ou a passw ord and an accoun t, or a login guest accoun t, so that y ou can log in on the remote hosts. 4-18 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Transferring Files with ftp 1. T o in v ok e ftp and connect to a remote host in one step, t yp e the follo wing: ftp r emote hostname This connects y ou to the remote host. ftp then conîrms the connection and prompts y ou for a remote login name: Name ( r emote hostname ): If y ou in tend to log in with the same remote login name as y our lo cal login name, just press 4 Return 5 . 2. En ter the p assw ord a sso ciated with y our remote login name and ftp will conîrm this action with a message and a conîrmation that y ou are l ogged in: Password ( r emote hostname ): invisible p asswor d Password required for r emote lo gin name User r emote lo gin name logged in. 3. If y ou are going to transfer binary (as opp osed to \readable" text) îles, t yp e bin at the prompt, b efore p ro ceeding. Use get to transfer îles from a r emote host to y our lo c al dir e ctory . A t the ftp> prompt, t yp e: get r emote îlename The r emote îlename is the name of a île in the remote w orking directory . In that case, ftp copies the île to the lo cal w orking directory and giv es it the s ame île name as the r emote name . If the île is in another directory on the remote host, r emote îlename is the absolute or relativ e p ath for that île. The ftp program copies t he île t o a île n ame with the same path o n y our l o cal system. (F or example, get /user/doc/ îlename ). If there i s n o m atc hing path, ftp giv es y ou a message, \ No such file or directory ". If the d estination île a lready exists, ftp o v erwrites its con ten ts with the con ten ts of the remote île. When c op ying successfully , ftp giv es y ou messages conîrming the c op y and the length o f time i t r equired. Using the C ommand Line 4-19
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Use put to transfer îles from y our lo c al dir e ctory to a r emote host . A t the ftp> prompt, t yp e: put lo c al îlename r emote îlename In this case, lo c al îlename is copied to the remote île name in the sp eciîed remote directory . lo c al îlename can b et h e name of the lo cal île in y our curren t lo cal w orking directory . ftp will cop y the île in to a île of the same name in r emote île . r emote îlename can b e an absolute or relativ e path to a île name on the r emote host. I f not sp eciîed otherwise, it will b e in the curren t w orking directory on the remote host. General File-Manipulation Commands for ftp See Using HP-UX for information on ho w to use ftp île-manipulation commands, suc h as cd, mkdir, pwd , and rmdir , man y of whic h function in the same w a y as the corresp onding HP-UX commands. If y ou need information on an y of the ftp commands, just t yp e help (or ? ) at the ftp prompt. Exiting ftp T o close the connection with the remote host and exit ftp , t yp e: bye Cop ying Files Remotely Using rcp Y ou can cop y îles b e t w een H P-UX o r other UNIX hosts on the n et w ork using rcp . Also, using appropriate options, y ou can c op y d irectories b et w een systems using rcp , i f the conîguration îles that the service u ses a re set up prop erly . Preparing to Use rcp T ou s e rcp ,y ou'll need the follo wing prerequisites: An accoun t (login) o n the remote host. 4-20 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 A .rhosts île in the remote host home directory con taining the names of y our lo cal host system and y our lo cal login name. A .rhosts île o n y our lo cal system, as w ell. This con tains the names of all the systems y ou will cop y from. It will ensure that y ou will b ea b l e to use rcp when y ou use rlogin on the remote system. Note A $HOME/.rhosts île creates a signiîcan t securit y r isk. T o prev en t unauthorized users form gaining remsh access to y our remote accoun t and host, only you should b e able to create and write to a .rhosts île in y our remote home directory . P ermissions need to b e set accordingly . A /etc/host île on y our lo cal system whic h lists hosts with whic h y ou can comm unicate using ARP A/Berk eley Services. F or eac h host, the île has a line con taining information ab out t he remote host in the follo wing form: internet a ddr ess oîcial name alias Y ou will înd t hat the /etc/hosts île is useful for lo oking up names and addresses on the net w ork. T o facilitate suc ha lo okup, use the grep to ol describ ed in gr ep (1) and in Using HP-UX . Cop ying a Local File to a R emote Host T o cop y from y our system to a remote system, use the follo wing syn tax: rcp lo c al îlename r emote hostname : r emote îlename Note that, if lo c al île is not in y our curren t directory , y ou will need to supply the relativ e path (to get f rom y our curren t directory) or the absolute path (from / ), in addition to the l o cal î le name. Y ou will need to sp ecify the complete (absolute) path for the r emote îlename on r emote hostname only if y ou w an ti t t o g o i n to a d irectory other t han the r emote h ome d irectory . F or example, t o c op y myfile from y our c urren t directory to a r emote s ystem called xyz : rcp myfile xyz:/users/leslie/otherdir Using the C ommand Line 4-21
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 In this case, myfile will b e copied as myfile in to the remote sub directory , otherdir . If y ou had only supplied the remote host name, rcp w ould ha v e copied myfile in to the remote home directory , also a s myfile . Y ou can also include a îlename in the destination. F or example, to cop y to a system named xyz : rcp myfile xyz:/users/leslie/otherfile In this case, y ou ha v e copied myfile as otherfile , in the remote directory leslie . Cop ying a File on a Remote Host to Y our Local Directory No w, to rev erse the pro cess, here is ho w y ou w ould cop y a île fr om a remote host in to y our lo cal directory . Use the follo wing syn tax: rcp r emote hostname : r emote îlename lo c al îlename F or example, to cop y myfile from y our accoun t in a remote system xyz in to y our curren t directory: rcp xyz:/users/leslie/myfile . The dot ( . ) is shorthand for \curren t directory". In this case, myfile will b e copied as myfile from the remote directory in to y our curren t directory . Y ou do not ha v e to supply the destination îlename if y ou don't w an t to cop y it to a new name. If y ou w an t to cop y myfile in to another directory in y our home system, use a path name, absolute or relativ e, as sho wn: rcp xyz:/users/leslie/myfile otherdir/ Or, if y ou w an t to cop y the île t o another î le name in another directory: rcp xyz:/users/leslie/myfile otherdir/otherfile Run the ls command t o c onîrm what y ou ha v e d one. 4-22 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Logging In on Another Computer Using rlogin If y ou ha v e an accoun to n a remote host , then y ou can use rlogin to log in on a remote host b y supplying y our remote login name and passw ord. Y ou can then w ork on that system just as y ou w ould on y our home system. If the remote host is conîgured to allo wi t , y ou can also log in on a remote host automatically , without ha ving to supply y our login name and passw ord. Logging In on a Remote Host A t the shell prompt, u se the form: rlogin r emote hostname The r emote hostname is the name of an appropriately conîgured remote system. As b efore, this system is named in y our /etc/hosts île and in y our .rhosts île. The remote host prompts y ou for y our remote passw ord. En ter y our remote passw ord. The remote host logs y ou in with the login message and the remote host prompt. If for some reason y ou should mak e an error in en tering y our passw ord, the remote host will giv e y ou the error message, \ Login incorrect ", and will prompt y ou for y our login, and y our passw ord: Login incorrect login: Getting the Same W orking Environment on the Remote Host T o get the remote host en vironmen t to b eha v e in the same w a y as y our home en vironmen t, y ou can s et the .profile or .login v alues to b e the same b y cop ying y our lo cal .profile or .login îles to y our home directory on the remote system. A s with y our h ome s ystem, t he v alues i n y our .profile or .login will tak e p recedence o v er the v alues i n the remote system's /etc/profile or /etc/csh.login île. Logging O ut and E xiting the Remote Host Y ou can log out o f the remote h ost j ust a s y ou w ould from y our home system, b yt yping: Using the C ommand Line 4-23
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 exit T yping 4 CTRL 5 - 4 D 5 also logs y ou out o n most system. A t this p oin t y ou are logged out of the remote host, disconnected, and returned to HP-UX on y our lo cal system, whic h displa ys a message and y our lo cal prompt: Connection closed. $ Displa ying Remote Graphical Programs Locally If y ou are running HP VUE or the X Windo w System, y ou can run a program using windo ws on a remote mac hine and displa y the results lo cally . This is done b y setting the DISPLAY en vironmen t v ariable on the remote system. DISPLAY sets the host, displa y n um b er, and screen n um b er to whic h a system sends bitmapp ed output for clien ts. F or example, if the remote mac hine is called r emote , y our lo cal system is lo c al , and the remote program is called xwijit , en ter the follo wing on y our system: xhost r emote This enables your system to r e c o gnize the r emote h ost. rlogin r emote L o g in on a r emote machine on which you have an ac c ount. DISPLAY= lo c al :0.0 On the r emote machine, set the DISPLA Y variable to display on your lo c al system. export DISPLAY Exp ort the v ariable xwijit R un the pr o gr am 4-24 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 For More Information F or detailed information on running HP VUE in a net w ork ed en vironmen t, see the HP VUE User's Guide . Using the C ommand Line 4-25
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 5 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our Softw are Chapter Contents Bac king Up Y our System and Soft w are. Restoring Individual Files. Restoring Y our Op erating System Using the Reco v ery T ap e. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Backing Up Y our System and Softw are The most imp ortan t part of y our system is the data y ou ha v e accum ulated. It is also esp ecially imp ortan t to protect y our o p erating system from corruption if y our HP-UX has be e n supplied as a pre-installed \Instan t Ignition" disk. Y ou can protect y our data and op erating system from loss, using the general pro cedures giv en in this c hapter. F or detailed pro cedures, see Instal l ing and Up dating HP-UX 9.0 or System A dministr ation T asks . Mak e sure y ou create and main tain a bac kup HP-UX k ernel ( /SYSBCKUP ) on y our disk from whic h y ou can b oo t in an emergency . A /SYSBCKUP is automatically created b y SAM whenev er y ou reconîgure and reb o ot a new k ernel from y our system console. T o build y our bac kup system, y ou can use the follo wing devices: Cartridge tap e driv es DDS F ormat (\D A T") driv es Magneto-optical disk driv es Other hard disk driv es Bac k up y our île system regularly . If y ou receiv ed y our w orkstation with Instan t Ignition, it is imp ortan t to create y our îrst reco v ery tap ea n d to arc hiv e y our existing île system as so on as p ossible . Creating a Reco v ery System A \reco v ery system" is a sp ecial tap e con taining a subset of the HP-UX op erating s ystem and s ome restoration to ols. In the ev en t of an op erating system failure that prev en ts y ou from b o oting or logging in to HP-UX, y ou can bo ot from the reco v ery system tap e and use the t o ols on the tap et o repair the île system on y our disk. A reco v ery system is created b y using commands rather than b y using SAM. Y ou can also restore y our s ystem from a system C D R OM that y ou can purc hase from y our HP sales represen tativ e. Y ou should m ak e a system reco v ery tap e u sing mkrs at the follo wing times: Immediately after y ou set u p y our new w orkstation. 5-2 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Eac h time y ou up date y our op erating system or mak e a c hange in y our disk sw ap conîguration. T o do this, y ou will need a tap e driv e (cartridge or DDS-format) and one or more tap es. Using mkrs to Create a Reco v ery System: The mkrs command constructs a reco v ery system on a tap e or a formatted hard disk driv e. If y our system later b ecomes un b o otable due to a corrupt ro ot disk, then y ou can b o ot y our system from the reco v ery tap e or the alternate hard disk. Once b o oted on the reco v ery system, y ou can then use the to ols it pro vides to repair the corrupt ro ot disk. Some Options for mkrs If enough free disk space is a v ailable in /usr/tmp (t ypically 10-20Mb), the -q option can b e used to mak e mkrs create an image of the reco v ery system in this directory b efore it copies it to the reco v ery medium. This option generally sa v es a great deal of time due to reduced seeking on non-random-access reco v ery medium (cartridge or DDS tap e). F or DDS-format tap e reco v ery systems, the -q option is assumed. When creating a DDS-format reco v ery system for a small memory w orkstation (8Mb or less), the -s option should b e used to sp ecify that a smaller set of îles b e placed on the reco v ery system. See mkrs (1M) for more options with mkrs . Source Device Files By default, mkrs uses the follo wing source device îles: /dev/update.src /dev/rct/c0 /dev/rct If none of the a b o v e defaults exist on y our system, one of these devic e îles must b ec r e ate d or the -f option m ust b e u sed t o s p e cify the device île t o b e used. The reco v ery d evice î le can b e e ither blo c ko r c haracter. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Root Device Files mkrs ,b y default, uses the follo wing device îles for the ro ot device: /dev/dsk/0s0 /dev/root /dev/hd If none of the ab o v e defaults exist on the system, one of these device îles m ust b e created or the -r option m ust b e used to sp ecify the device île to b e used. The ro ot device île m ust b e ab l o c k device î le. If Y ou Ha v e a Problem An error message results if: None of the default device îles for the r eco v ery device exist and the -f option is not used to sp ecify a reco v ery device île. None of the default device îles for the ro ot device exist and the -r option is not used to sp ecify ar o ot device île. The mac hine t yp e cannot b e determined and the -m option is not used to sp ecify the mac hine t yp e. Backing Up Y our F ile Systems Preparation: The follo wing pro cedure sets up as c heduled b ac kup: 1. If y our system is more than six mon ths old, y ou ha v e n on-HP supp orted soft w are, or y ou ha v e nev er done a bac kup b efore, see System A dministr ation T asks or Instal ling and Up dating HP-UX 9.0 b efore p ro ceeding. Otherwise, SAM will pro vide in teractiv e g uidance. T o use SAM, do the follo wing: 2. Log i n a s root . 3. T yp e /usr/bin/sam . 4. Cho ose NNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNN Backup and Recovery from the o p e ning men u. 5. Cho ose NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNN Backup Devices (to determine what b ac kup devices are connected) or NNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Automated Backups . 5-4 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 a. If y ou op ened NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Backup Devices , and no devices are sho wn, mak e sure the device is connected and the tap e is inserted. Note If y ou ha v e to connect a device during this p ro cess, c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Refresh from the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Options men u. b. Cho ose the en try for the desired device. c. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N Add an Automated Backup from the N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N Actions men u. 1. If y ou go directly to N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Automated Backups , y ou can select y our lo cal or remote bac kup device from N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Actions ! N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Add an Automated Backup (Lo cal or Remote) ! N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Specify Backup Device . A f orm will displa ya n y existing bac kup devices. 2. Before initiating the bac kup, v erify that y our tap e is not write-protected b y c hec king that the write-protect device is in \writable" p osition. 3. Load at a p e in to the tap e driv e. Dep ending on what tap e driv e y ou are using, y ou ma y see activit y ligh ts îashing while the tap e is loading. Y ou can pro ceed when one ligh t remains on, indicating that the driv e is ready to accept d ata. 4. F rom the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N Add an Automated Backup screen, y ou can select the options whic h will bring up additional forms for sp ecifying the follo wing required items: a. N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Select Backup Device (if y ou ha v e not already sp eciîed it). b. N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N Select Backup Scope : what îlesets to include or exclude. The default is to bac kup the e n tire system. c. N NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Select Backup Time : time, da y , date. Y ou can also set whether y ou w an t a full or incremen tal bac kup, for eac h t ime sp eciîcation. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 5. NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N Additional Parameters (optional) allo ws y ou to sp ecify the follo wing: a. If y ou w an t y our bac kups to cross NFS moun t p oin ts. b. If y ou w an t the tap e (cartridge or auto c hanger) r ew ound. c. If y ou w an t an index log t o b e created for eac h bac kup. (Results can b e mailed t o a designated user). 6. After the minim um required forms are îlled out, SAM w ill then use y our tap e device to complete the bac kup according to y our sp eciîcations. 5-6 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Restoring Individual Files T o restore sp eciîed îles from a lo cal device using SAM, îrst y ou will need to ha v e the follo wing information and materials: A list of îles y ou need. The media on whic h the data resides. The lo cation on y our system to restore the îles (original lo cation or relativ e to some other lo cation). The device and device île for restoring the data. Note T o restore data to disks ph ysically connected to another system, en ter the NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N Remote Administration functional area of SAM. When restoring îles that are NFS moun ted to y our system, frecover can only restore those îles ha ving \other user" write p ermission. The frecover command normally op erates in user -mo de when crossing NFS moun t p oin ts; not root -mo de. T o ensure that frecover can restore the îles exp orted from the NFS serv er, login as root on the NFS île serv er and use the root= option to the /usr/etc/exportfs command to exp ort the correct p ermissions. Refer to exp ortfs (1M) in the HP-UX R efer enc e and the Instal ling and A dministering NFS Servic es man ual. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 T o Restore Individual Files: 1. Ensure that y ou ha v e root capabilities. 2. Run SAM b y t yping: /usr/bin/sam 3. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N Backup and Recovery 4. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Backup Devices . 5. Highligh tt h e device in the list from whic h the data is to b e restored. 6. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Recover Files or Directories from the N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N Actions men u and highligh t N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Select Recovery Scope . Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK or press 4 Return 5 . 7. Cho ose the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N Selected Files c hec kb o x (it should ha v e an asterisk (*) in it. Do either of the follo wing: Fill in the îlename con taining a list of îles to restore. The îlenames should b e full pathnames. This île is not a graph île. This île is used to create a graph île. Y ou can use the on-line index île created b y a previous bac kup, but it m ust b e edited to con taining only the full pathnames of the îles to b e r estored. Or en ter eac h île name in the \Included" and \Excluded" b o xes and c ho ose N N N N N NN NN N N Add . If y ou mak e a mistak e, highligh t the en try with the error and use N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N Modify or N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N Remove to correct the mistak e. Only the \Included" b o x is required, if y ou c ho ose this metho d. Y ou can use b oth the île and the included/excluded metho d sim ultaneously to sp ecify î les to b e r estored. When y ou ha v e completed determining the selected îles to b e reco v ered, activ ate N NNNNNNN OK . 5-8 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 8. T o do an y of the follo w ing during the restore pro cess, activ ate N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N Set Additional Parameters : Ov erwrite new îles. Main tain original o wnership. Reco v er îles using full path name, or Place îles in a non-ro ot directory . T urn on the appropriate c hec kb o x(es). T o restore îles relativ e to a particular directory , îll in the directory . Activ ate the N N N N N N N N OK con trol button to set the a dditional parameters. 9. Activ ate the N N N N N N N N OK con trol button to start the restore pro cess. If conîrmation messages app ear, read the message(s) and activ ate t he N N N N N N N N OK con trol button to pro ceed in eac h case. SAM displa ys a windo w con taining the output of the executed frecover command. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Restoring Y our Operating System Using the Reco v ery T ape If y our op erating system or the en tire ro ot disk b ecomes c orrupted and not usable, y ou can restore y our system using y our reco v ery system tap e and y our arc hiv e bac kup tap e(s). Also see App endix A for information on using the Bo ot R OM to înd and b oo t from a reco v ery tap e. If y our op erating system is still u sable but n ot functioning c orrectly , y ou can load the îleset TOOL from an up date tap e to obtain diagnostic utilities, Y ou can b oo t a memory-based v ersion of hp-ux (kno wn as a r e c overy system ) from the tap e cartridge or DDS-format reco v ery tap e whic h y ou ha v e made. F rom the reco v ery system, y ou can moun t and unmoun t île systems, run fsck to c hec k and repair île systems, cop y îles bac ko n to y our system disk, and v arious other tasks. Caution Do not run fsck on a île system that is moun ted and a ctiv e. This could in tro duce data corruption. Run fsck in single-user mo de when c hec king the ro ot île system. F or île systems other than the ro ot île system, unmoun t the île system, run fsck , and then remoun t the île system. If y our system disk (including /SYSBCKUP ) is un b o otable, do the follo wing: 1. Load the reco v ery t ap ei n y our tap e driv e and b e sure that the driv e is turned on. 2. W ait for the driv e to b ecome r eady (the \busy" ligh t remains o î ). 3. Reset y our computer b y turning it oî and then bac k on. B o ot the system and pause the b o ot pro cess b y pressing 4 ESC 5 after the computer p erforms its color self-test and prompts for b o ot selection. 5-10 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 4. A t the b oo t selection screen, select the op erating system that is on the tap e driv e as the one y ou w an t to b o ot from. F or example, for the t ap ed r i v e: ... 1R SYSRECOVERY ... En ter b and the devic e sp e ciîc ation , suc h as 1R : b devic e sp e ciîc ation 5. Y our reco v ery system should b egin loading from the tap e. Once y our reco v ery system is up and running y ou will ha v e a minim um set of commands to use, in order to help y ou repair and r estore y our primary (disk-based) op erating system. 6. F rom this p oin t, the sp eciîc things y ou need to do to reco v er y our primary system dep end on the nature of the b o ot problem. Some of the things that y ou migh t need to do are outlined in the follo wing list: Note If y our inabilit y to b o ot y our system is caused b y fault y hardw are, it will b e necessary to ha v e that hardw are repaired b efore y ou can pro ceed with the items in this list. a. Y ou migh t need to run the fsck program to repair y our ro ot île system. Do so in single-user mo de only . b. The /hp-ux k ernel île can b e restored, if it has b een corrupted or remo v ed, b y doing the follo wing: i. Moun ting y our system disk to an empt y directory (mak e one if necessary) in y our memory-based reco v ery system. ii. Using the cp command to cop y the /hp-ux île from y our memory-based system (it is a c op yo f y our r e al /hp-ux île) to the directory y ou used as a moun t p oin tf o r y our system disk. The destination île should b e called hp-ux . Backing Up, Restoring, and U pdating Y our Softw are 5-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 c. Y ou migh t need to restore imp ortan t system îles suc h as /etc/inittab , /etc/rc , etc. from y our memory-based system to y our system disk. The pro cedure for doing this is almost iden tical t o the pro cedure for restoring /hp-ux . Only the île names and directories will b e diîeren t. d. Y ou migh t also need to mo v e, remo v e, cop y , or searc h for other îles. Note that the memory-based system has limited capabilities. Y our primary ob jectiv e is to restore y our disk-based system to a b o otable condition and then reb o ot y our computer from y our system disk. F rom that p oin t, y ou can reco v er lost îles from bac kup tap e s, or whatev er else is necessary to restore y our system to its normal op erational condition. For More Information F or more information on bac kup and reco v ery , see Instal ling and Up dating HP-UX 9.0 , System A dministr ation T asks , and the references for mkrs (1m), cpio (1), and tcio (1) in the man pages or in HP VUE H elp. Also see Solving HP-UX Pr oblems . 5-12 Backing Up, Restoring, and U pdating Y our Softw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 6 Configuring HP-UX for Printers and Driv es Chapter Contents Preparing for Installation. Conîguring HP-UX for a Prin ter. Finding the Status of Existing SCSI Bus Addresses. Conîguring for a Hard Disk Driv e. Conîguring for a Flexible Disk Driv e. Conîguring for a CD R OM Driv e. Conîguring for aD D S T ap e Driv e. Configuring H P-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Preparing for Installation If y our system w as shipp ed with its in ternal mass storage devices factory-installed, y ou will not need to do further installation to enable the device to comm unicate w ith HP-UX. I f y ou ha v e purc hased a new (upgrade) device, y ou will ha v e to install it on HP-UX. Y ou ma y also ha v et o do some conîguration for appropriate data in terc hange with a new prin ter. This c hapter giv es y ou general guidance f or these tasks. F or p eripherals devices i n general: F or a list of device upgrades whic h are supp orted b y the Mo del 382 see \In ternal Mass Storage D evices" in Chapter 1. See the Instal lation Guide for the device y ou are i nstalling for information on hardw are installation. Y ou can also get installation information from Instal ling Peripher als . Ensure that eac h new device y ou install whic h comm unicates through the SCSI proto col has a unique bus addr ess . Y ou can use /etc/ioscan (see \Finding the Status of Existing SCSI Bus Addresses") to determine this, or y ou can use SAM (System Administration Manager). The factory-set SCSI addresses for the upgrade devices in this c hapter are a s follo ws: Hard Disk Driv e: 6 Flexible Disk Driv e: 0 CD R OM Driv e: 2 DDS Driv e: 3 This c hapter sho ws y ou ho w to use basic SAM (System A dministration Manager) pro cedures. SAM will determine the status of an y of y our connected devices and will p erform man y installation tasks for y ou. If y ou don't w an t t o use SAM, or it is not o n y our system, y ou can a lso HP-UX c ommands directly to accomplish the same tasks. F or information on using man ual system administration p ro cedures, see System A dministr ation T asks . 6-2 Configuring H P-UX for P rinters and Driv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring HP-UX for a Printer Y ou will need to supply certain items of information needed to iden tify the prin ter y ou are installing. It will help to ha v e this information a v ailable to refer to during t he soft w are i nstallation pro cess: Prin ter In terface: P arallel: Serial (RS232) P ort 1: Serial (RS232) P ort 2: Prin ter Name (a name the system uses to iden tify the prin ter. It can b e an y name.): Prin ter M o del Num b er (lo cated on a lab el on the bac k of the prin ter): Procedure: T o install y our prin ter: 1. Log in as root . Mak e sure y ou ha v e a prin ter connected. 2. Run SAM b y t yping the follo wing, and then pressing 4 Return 5 : /usr/bin/sam T o get help in SAM, pressing the 4 f1 5 k ey giv es y ou con text-sensitiv e information for the ob ject at the lo cation of the cursor. In case y ou are not using a mouse, arro w k eys and 4 T ab 5 also are used for mo ving the highligh t ed areas a round the screen. Activ ating b y pressing 4 Return 5 with N N N N N NN N OK illuminated i s e quiv alen t t o clic king the mouse on N N N N N NN N OK .S e e Using HP-UX for t he details o f k eyb oard equiv alen ts. 3. A t t he SAM o p ening screen, c ho ose ( highligh t and o p e n) NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Printers and Plotters . 4. Cho ose NNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Printers/Plotters from t he next screen. Configuring H P-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 If y our w orkstation do esn't ha v e an y prin ters connected, y ou will see a message. If y ou get this message, activ ate N N N N N NN N OK or press 4 Return 5 while N N N N N NN N OK is illuminated. 5. F rom the N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Actions men u (on the men u bar at the top of the Prin ter/Plotter Manager windo w), c ho ose NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN Add Local Printer/Plotter 6. Cho ose a n appropriate selection on the sub-men u giving options for P arallel, Serial, HP-IB, etc. 7. A windo w for the t yp e selected will giv e y ou information on a v ailable in terfaces. 8. If y ou c hose N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN Add Serial (RS-232) Printer/Plotter , more than one serial in terface could b e listed. The RS-232 in terfaces are listed in ascending order. The lo w est-n um b ered RS-232 in terface corresp onds to the lo w est-n um b ered RS-232 connector on y our system. Cho ose the one to whic h y ou ha v e connected y our prin ter. 9. Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . The windo w op ens for N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N Add Local Printer/Plotter . 10. Select the b o x lab eled N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Printer Name and en ter y our printername for the new prin ter (as en tered in this man ual earlier). 11. Cho ose NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Printer/Model Interface 12. Scroll do wn the next screen to înd the Mo del Name of y our prin ter. 13. Cho ose the Mo del Name. 14. Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . 15. In the N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N Add L ocal Printer/Plotter windo w w hic h r eapp ears, c ho ose t he bo x lab eled NNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNN Make this the system default printer (unless y ou w an t to add the device as an alternate prin ter). 16. Activ ate NNNNNNNN OK . 17. If y ou are running H P V UE, y ou will b e ask ed a question ab out a dding t he prin ter name to the VUE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN N Printers subpanel. 6-4 Configuring HP-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 18. If the prin ts p oo l e r w as not previously running, a windo w will app ear with the question: N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Do you want to start the print spooler now? . Select N N N N N N N N N N N Yes and press 4 Return 5 . 19. Y ou will see a conîrmation screen asking if y our prin ter is turned on, connected to y our system, and o nline. Chec k y our prin ter to ensure that it is ready , and press 4 Return 5 . 20. Y ou will see the message N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Task completed . Press 4 Return 5 . 21. Exit the task and c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N Exit SAM . 22. En ter exit to exit root and return to user status. Refer to System A dministr ation T asks , for additional SAM information. T esting the Printer Installation If y ou made y our prin ter the default system prin ter, en ter the follo wing commands to test it: cd lp .profile 4 Return 5 (If y our prin ter (called printername )i s n ' t the default system prin ter, en ter the follo wing command to test it:) lp -d printername .profile The île named .profile should prin t out on y our new prin ter. Configuring H P-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Dealing With Printer Problems If y ou exp erience problems in prin ting, ensure that the follo wing are correctly installed: The p o w er cord for the prin ter is plugged in. The prin ter is turned on. The prin ter selection switc hes are set for online. P ap er is loaded in to the prin ter (and it isn't jammed). The correct in terface has b een set up. The prin ter cable i s connected t o the c orrect in terface p ort on y our prin ter. The cable is connected to the correct p ort on y our system. 6-6 Configuring HP-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Finding the Status of Existing SCSI Bus Addresses Before y ou install a new SCSI driv e, to ensure that the SCSI bus address of y our device is curren tly un used, y ou can u se SAM, or y ou can use the ioscan to ol to help determine whic h devices are curren tly connected. T o determine the curren tly connected SCSI bus IDs, en ter the follo wing command line: /etc/ioscan -fb The result will b e a displa y of information, suc h as the follo wing: Class H/W Path Driver H/W Status S/W Status Description ========================================================= ================ ... disk 2.0.1.2.0 scsi ok(0x5800101) ok TOSHIBA CD-ROM tape_drive 2.0.1.3.0 scsitape ok(0x1800202) ok HP HP35450A disk 2.0.1.6.0 scsi ok(0x101) ok MICROP 1528 ... F or example, the SCSI bus address for the \MICR OP" disk device is in the fourth column of its hardw are address as \ 6 " ( 2.0.1. 6 .0 ). If y ou w ere installing another disk, for île s ystem use, it w ould b est b e accessed at the adjacen t SCSI bus address in the \scanning" order, \ 5 ". In an y ev en t, SAM will help y ou determine an a v ailable device île, corresp onding t o an y un used SCSI address setting, when y ou do the installation. Configuring H P-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring for a Hard Disk Driv e Hard disk driv e upgrades can b e installed to accommo date lo cal île systems and sw ap space on y our w orkstation. Softw are Installation of the Hard Disk Driv e Upgrade After hardw are installation has b een c ompleted (see the Instal lation Guide for this device), y ou'll need to ensure that y our op erating system is prepared to exc hange data with the device. This section pro vides instructions for conîguring HP-UX to comm unicate with a hard disk driv e upgrade. Note that y our HP disk is pre-formatted. Caution Although the device is w ell-protected from ph ysical sho c k when installed in the w orkstation, it is v ery easily damaged when separate. Av oid dropping or striking a d evice. The factory-set SCSI bus address for the disk driv e: F or an upgrade disk driv e: SCSI bus address: 6 This SCSI address assumes usage of the disk as root . Although the conîguration jump ers in the bac k of the driv e are factory-installed and should not require reconîguring, it is p ossible that the SCSI bus address jump ers for an upgrade ma y b e shipp ed with diîeren t settings. Therefore, please see the Instal lation Guide for the driv e for t he pro cedure for resetting jump ers, should it b e necessary . The follo wing list outlines the soft w are p ro cedures y ou'll înd in this section for installing the hard disk driv e as a île system disk: Use S AM to do the f ollo wing: Conîgure a n u n used device île w ith the select c o d e and bus address for y our d evice. Build a î le system on the d isk. Moun t the disk so that y ou can access it as a î le system. 6-8 Configuring HP-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Note SAM do es not supp ort the follo wing: Changing the hardw are address of a disk driv e con taining the ro ot île system. Changing the hardw are address of a disk arra y . Changing the hardw are address of a disk that is part of soft w are d isk striping. After hardw are installation has b een completed (see the Instal l ation Guide for this device), y ou'll need to ensure that y our op erating system is prepared to exc hange data with the device. This section pro vides i nstructions for doing this. 1. Run SAM b y t yping the follo wing: /usr/bin/sam Pressing the 4 f1 5 k ey giv es y ou con text-sensitiv e information for the ob ject at the lo cation of the cursor. 2. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N Disks and File Systems . 3. Cho ose N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N CD-ROM, Floppy, and Hard Disks . 4. F rom the N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N Actions men u, select the item N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Add a Hard Disk Drive . 5. F rom the screen whic h app ears, select the step N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN Select a Disk to Add . 6. Y ou will see a list of un used driv es. Cho ose the d isk y ou w an t to add from this list. 7. If the device y ou ha v e just connected do esn't app ear, activ ate NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Device Missing , a nd y ou will b e giv en the f ollo wing options: Configuring HP-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 a. Ha v e SAM r escan the system for t he device. If y ou ha v e connected the device after starting SAM, y ou should a ctiv ate N N N N N N N N N NN Yes . Otherwise, activ ate N N N N N N N N No . b. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether the device is connected and p o w ered up. c. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether additional device driv ers are needed. (Unless the k ernel has, for some reason, had d riv ers remo v ed, the d riv ers needed for a hard disk should curren tly b e in the k ernel.) d. Y ou will b e giv en an information screen suggesting t hings to try if the device still cannot b e found. If this is the case, y ou will need to consult Instal ling Peripher als . 8. After y ou c ho ose the d evice, y ou will see a form giving three tasks: a. NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N Select a Disk to Add . (Y ou ha v e already done this). b. N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Set Disk Usage and Options . c. N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Modify Defaults... . (This task is optional). Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N Set Disk Usage and Options . 9. On the form whic h app ears, select ho w y ou w an t to use the disk (\File System", \Sw ap", or b oth). Activ ate N N N N N NN N OK when y ou ha v e înished this step. 10. If y ou w an t to mo dify the defaults, complete the i nformation screen for this step. Then activ ate N N N N N N NN OK . 11. Y ou will b e returned to the NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N Add a Hard Disk Drive form. Activ ate NN NN NN NN OK to exit this form. 12. A \ Messages" B o xa p p ears, r ep orting the p rogress of the t ask. When the task is înished, a ctiv ate NNNNNNNN OK . 13. Exit SAM. (SAM copies y our o riginal /etc/checklist to /etc/checklist.old ). 6-10 Configuring HP-UX for Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 T esting Y our Installation A simple test to mak e certain that the d riv e has b een installed correctly (whether it is moun ted or not) is to execute the command diskinfo (using the appropriate c haracter device île name as the argumen t). F or example, en ter the f ollo wing at the shell prompt: diskinfo /dev/rdsk/6s0 If the disk is installed correctly , diskinfo will displa y a listing of information ab out it, suc h as the follo wing: SCSI describe of /dev/rdsk/6s0 vendor: Quantum product id: PD210S type: direct access size: 200000 Kbytes bytes per sector: 512 After moun ting a new disk on a directory , en ter ll at the shell prompt to get a directory listing. This should giv e y ou at least one île or directory e n try . F or example: total 1024 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 8192 Aug 31 15:24 lost found Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring for a Flexible Disk Driv e Caution Although the device is w ell-protected from ph ysical sho c k when installed in the w orkstation, it is v ery easily damaged when separate. Av oid dropping or striking a device. Note the îexible disk driv e jump ers are pre-conîgured correctly at the factory . It should not b e necessary to c hange jump er settings. The factory-set SCSI bus address for the driv e: SCSI bus address: 0 Note On this device, an installed address jump er is a logical 0 , con trary to the practice with most other SCSI devices,. Th us, al l thr e e addr ess j ump ers ar e normal ly instal le d . As it is p ossible that the SCSI bus setting for an upgrade ma yb e shipp ed diîeren tly , please c hec k the jump ers b efore installation. See the Instal lation Guide for the device for the pro cedure for resetting the device, should it b e necessary . After h ardw are installation has b een completed, y ou'll need to ensure that y our op erating system is prepared to exc hange d ata with the device. This section pro vides instructions for doing this. 1. If y ou wish to initialize a new disk, mak e sure y ou ha v e the disk loaded in the driv e. 2. Run SAM b y t yping the follo wing: /usr/bin/sam T o g et help i n S AM, p ressing the 4 f1 5 k ey giv es y ou con text-sensitiv e information for the o b j ect a t the lo cation o f the cursor. 3. Cho o se NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Disks and F ile Systems . 4. Cho o se NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NN CD-ROM, Floppy, a nd Hard D isks . 6-12 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 5. F rom the NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN Actions men u, select NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N Add a Floppy Disk Drive... . Y ou will see a list of un used disks, including the new one y ou ha v e connected. 6. Cho ose the line iden tifying the m o del o f the n ew disk. If the device y ou ha v e connected do es not app ear on the list: a. Chec k y our hardw are connections, and mak e sure that the device is turned on . b. Activ ate the button N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N Device Missing ,a n d y ou will b e giv en the follo wing options: i. Ha v e SAM rescan the system for the device. If y ou ha v e connected the device after starting SAM, y ou should activ ate N N N N N N N N N N N Yes . Otherwise, activ ate N N N N N N N N No . ii. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether the device is connected and po w ered up. iii. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether additional device driv ers are needed. iv. Y ou will b e giv en an information screen suggesting things to try if the device still cannot b e found. 7. After y ou highligh t the device, note that the N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Initialize disk button is toggled on (the default). Activ ate this button to turn it oî if y ou do not wish to initialize a disk (or if the disk is preformatted). 8. Activ ate NN N N N N N N OK when y ou ha v e înished w ith this form. 9. A \Messages" Bo xa p p ears, rep orting the progress of the task. When the task is înished, activ ate N NN N N N N N OK . 10. Exit SAM. (SAM copies y our o riginal /etc/checklist to /etc/checklist.old ). Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 T esting Y our Installation A simple test to mak e certain that ev erything has b een installed correctly is to execute the command diskinfo . 1. Mak e sure a îexible disk is inserted in the driv e (otherwise, a core dump ma y result). 2. T yp e the follo wing, using the appropriate device île name as the argumen t. F or example: diskinfo /dev/rfloppy/0s0 If the disk is installed correctly , diskinfo will displa y a listing of information ab out it, suc h as the follo wing: /dev/rfloppy/0s0 SCSI describe of 0.rdsk: vendor: TEAC product id: XXXXXXX type: direct access size: 1400000 bytes bytes per sector: NNN If y ou wish to test the installation of y our îexible disk driv e without a disk installed, use the ioscan command. 6-14 Configuring HP-UX for Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Archiving Files to a Flexible Disk Data can b e stored on îexible disk media i n av ariet y of formats. The capacit y of these d evices is generally to o small to hold useful HP-UX île systems. Instead, DOS or LIF île systems are commonly used. Data can also b e stored in an arc hiv e-utilit y format. F or example, tar and cpio are commonly used to share data with other HP-UX systems. See the man pages or HP-UX R efer enc e references dosif (4) and lif (4) f or detailed descriptions of the île systems. F or information o n tar and cpio , see tar (1) and cpio . T o sa v e îles arc hiv ally to a î exible disk using tar , use a formatted disk and en ter the follo wing command line, where p athname is the directory where the îles reside: tar -cvf /dev/rfloppy/0s0 p athname Retrieving Files from a Flexible Disk T o list îles stored in a tar arc hiv e on a îexible disk, without transferring them to y our hard disk, use the follo wing command line: tar -tvf /dev/rfloppy/0s0 This lists all the îles on the îexible disk. T o transfer or restore îles from a îexible disk to y our hard disk driv e, do the follo wing: 1. Load the source disk in to the îexible d isk driv e. 2. Using cd , mak e sure y ou are in in directory y ou w an tt h e îles to reside in. 3. En ter t he follo wing command line to restore p athname on the disk to y our curren t directory: tar - xvf / dev/rfloppy/0s0 p athname Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Mounting a New Flexible Disk If y ou w an t HP-UX t o be able to address a newly-inserted îexible disk as a small île s ystem, y ou will need to moun t it. Execute the follo wing to moun t the new disk. F or example, using \ /flex " as the m oun t d irectory: mount /dev/floppy/0s0 /flex See the next section for information on moun ting and u nmoun ting a disk used as a île system. 6-16 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Remo ving and Inserting a File-System F lexible Disk Caution If y ou wish to use t he disk as am o u n ted île system, y ou m ust moun t it ev ery time y ou insert it in to the driv e, and y ou m ust unmoun t the disk b efore y ou eject it from the driv e. Y ou will need to do the follo wing: Before y ou remo v e a d isk: 1. T emp orarily unmoun t the île system for the disk b y executing the follo wing. F or example, if the disk is designated b yt h e blo c k d evice île /dev/floppy/0s0 : umount /dev/floppy/0s0 2. Remo v e the disk. After y ou insert a disk: 1. Moun t the disk île system so that HP-UX will recognize it. If, for example, y ou are moun ting the disk in a driv e designated b yt h e device île /dev/floppy/0s0 under a pre-existing directory /flex , execute the follo wing: mount /dev/floppy/0s0 /flex (Note that the directory /flex , in the example, m ust be giv en an absolute path name). In this example, the mount command announces to the system that a remo v able île system is to b e attac hed at the directory /flex . 2. No w y ou can access the î exible disk as y ou w ould an y other disk. Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-17
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring for a CD ROM Driv e Y ou can u se aC D R OM (\Compact Disc Read-Only Memory") driv e to accommo date read-only use of a wide v ariet y of soft w are, including HP-UX system up dates. After hardw are installation for a driv e has b een completed (see the Instal lation Guide for this device), y ou'll n eed to ensure that y our op erating system is prepared to exc hange data with the device. This section pro vides instructions for conîguring HP-UX to comm unicate with the CD R OM driv e. Note The CD R OM driv e cannot b e lo cally-moun ted on a diskless no de, although its driv er m ust be conîgured in to eac h cluster no de's k ernel. This section deals with the follo wing topics: Installing the CD R OM with SAM. T esting the installation. Moun ting the new CD R OM. Remo ving and inserting ad i s c . The factory-set SCSI address for this device: SCSI bus address: 2 As it is p ossible that the CD R OM driv e ma y b e s hipp ed with a d iîeren t S CSI bus setting, please see the Instal lation Guide for the device for guidance on resetting it, if necessary . Inserting the disc in y our CD ROM driv e. Note that a rigid p lastic caddy holds and p rotects the d isc. Before inserting the disc, mak es u r e y ou ha v e t he disc installed i n t he appropriate disc caddy . When inserted i n to the disc p o rt, d ata is read f rom t he disc through a sh utter in the c addy . When y ou eject the caddy , t he sh utter closes to protect t he disc's data surface. The disc caddy for a n H P u pgrade driv e, suc ha s the H P A2644A, is not in terc hangeable w ith t he HP C1707A C D R OM Driv e d isc c addy .H o w ev er, 6-18 Configuring HP-UX for Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 y ou can remo v e the disc from one caddy and use the other, if necessary , in order to ît the appropriate driv e. Disc caddies are a v ailable from Hewlett-P ac k ard. Caution Do not op en the disc caddy sh utter man ually . Op ening the sh utter will exp ose t he disc's data surface t o dust and damage. I f the data surface gets to o m uc h dust or damage, its readabilit y b y the CD R OM driv e's laser read head will b e reduced. Installing the CD ROM Driv e with SAM It is a go o d idea to mak e a note of y our C D R OM driv e mo del and its hardw are address (select co de and bus address), b efore y ou do the soft w are installation. CD R OM Mo del: Bus Address: Configuring the Driv e on HP-UX: 1. Log in as root . 2. Run SAM b y t yping the follo wing: $ /usr/bin/sam 3. Cho ose N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N Disks and File Systems-> . 4. Cho ose NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N CD-ROM, Floppy, and Hard Disks . 5. F rom the N N N NN NN NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N Actions men ubar in the \Disk and File System Manager" windo w, highligh t a nd c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N Add a H ard Disk Drive... 6. Within the \ Add a Hard Disk Driv e" windo w, c ho ose NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNN Select Disk to Add . 7. Within the NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN N Select a Disk to Add windo w, highligh t the line i den tifying the n ew driv ey ou ha v e just connected. It will b e describ e d a s, for e xample, Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-19
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 \CD R OM-SCSI", follo w ed b y its mo del n um b er and bus address. Activ ate N N N N N NN N OK . If the device y ou ha v e connected d o es not app ear on the list: a. Chec k y our hardw are connections, and mak e sure that the device is turned on and that there is a disc in it. b. Activ ate the button N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Device Missing , and y ou will b eg i v en the follo wing options: i. Ha v eS A M rescan the system for the device. If y ou ha v e connected the device after starting SAM, y ou should activ ate N N N N N N N N N N N Yes . Otherwise, activ ate N NN N N N N N No . ii. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether the device is connected and p o w ered up. iii. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether additional device driv ers are needed. iv. Y ou will b e giv en an information screen suggesting things to try if the device still cannot b e found. If this is the case, y ou will need to consult Instal ling Peripher als . 8. If y ou need to add driv ers t o the k ernel, SAM will prompt y ou for doing so and will ask whether y ou wish to recreate the k ernel no w or later. Mak e this selection b y pressing 4 Return 5 when y our selection is highligh ted. Then the selection is designated b y an asterisk (*) in its blank. Activ ate N NN NN N N N OK to en ter that selection. 9. N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Set Disk Usage and Options . (File system usage is already set for a CD R OM.) En ter the moun t directory where y ou w an t the C D R OM to b e. 10. N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N Modify Defaults... . (This task i s o ptional). Y ou ma yw an tt o c hange certain options, suc h a s w hen to moun t t he disk and h o w i ts access p ermissions are set. If so, w ithin the NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Add a Hard D isk Drive windo w, highligh t a nd activ ate NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNN Modify Defaults . Then, w ithin the d ialog b o x, select o r m o d ify the options that apply . 11. Activ ate NNNNNNNN OK when y ou ha v e î nished with the m ain NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NN Add a Hard Disk Drive form. 6-20 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 12. A \Messages" Bo xa p p ears, rep orting the progress of the task. When the task is înished, activ ate 4 OK 5 . 13. Exit SAM b y returning to op ening screen a nd activ ating 4 Exit SAM 5 . T esting Y our Installation A simple test to mak e certain that ev erything has b een installed correctly is to execute the command diskinfo . 1. First mak es u r e aC D R OM is inserted in the driv e. 2. Then, t yp e the follo wing (using the appropriate device île name as the argumen t). F or example: diskinfo /dev/rdsk/2s0 If the disk is installed correctly , diskinfo will displa y a listing of information ab out it, suc h as the follo wing: 2s0 SCSI describe of /dev/rdsk/2s0 vendor: TOSHIBA product id: CD-ROM DRIVE:XM type: CD-ROM size: nnnnnn Kbytes bytes per sector: 2048 Mounting the New C D ROM Driv e SAM will moun t the disc for y ou when y ou install the driv e. Y ou can then moun t it and unmoun ti t man ually ,u s i n g the mount and umount commands, as with a îexible disk. If y ou ha v en o t already h ad SAM d o s o, in order for y our system t o b o o t with the new CD R OM moun ted, y ou will need to edit y our /etc/checklist .A d d the f ollo wing line to the /etc/checklist île: /dev/dsk/2s0 /cdrom c dfs r o 0 0 # CD ROM If y ou ha v e only made this c hange to y our system, executing mount - a will moun t t he new d isk automatically , a nd it will sta ym o u n ted u n til y ou unmoun t Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-21
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 it man ually . (Note that using the -a option moun ts al l unmoun ted devices in /etc/checklist .) After moun ting a new disk on a directory , an ll listing of the directory should giv e y ou at least one île or directory en try . F or example: total 1024 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 8192 Aug 31 15:24 îlename See the next section for information on unmoun ting the disc b efore y ou remo v e it. Remo ving and I nserting a D isc Y ou m ust moun t a CD R OM disc ev ery time y ou insert it in to the driv e, and y ou m ust unmoun t the disc b efore the system w ill allo w y ou to eject it from the driv e. Note The eject button on the CD R OM driv e is disabled w hile the device is moun ted or in use. 6-22 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Before y ou remo v e a disc: 1. F or example, if the disc is designated b y the blo c k device île /dev/dsk/2s0 , temp orarily unmoun t the disk's île system b y executing the follo wing: umount /dev/dsk/2s0 2. Press the eject button to remo v e the disk After y ou insert a disk: 1. Moun t the CD R OM île system so that HP-UX will recognize it. If, for example, y ou are moun ting the C D R OM designated b y the device îlename /dev/dsk/2s0 , create a directory /cdrom (if it do esn't exist already) and execute the follo wing: mount /dev/dsk/2s0 /cdrom (Note t hat the directory /cdrom , in the example, m ust b e giv en as an absolute path name). In this example, the mount command announces to the system that a remo v able île system is to b e attac hed at the directory /cdrom . This directory b ecomes the name of the ro ot of the newly-moun ted île system. 2. No w y ou can access the CD R OM as y ou w ould an y other disk, except that y ou cannot write to it. 3. A îashing busy ligh t indicates normal activit yw i t h the s ystem. For More Information F or more information on the mount , umount , and reboot commands, please see the appropriate en tries in HP-UX R efer enc e . Y ou can also use y our online command help system b yt yping man , follo w ed b y t he name of the command, and 4 Return 5 . Information o n t he installation of external p e ripheral devices can b e found i n Instal ling Peripher als . Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-23
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring for a DDS T ape Driv e This section con tains instructions for conîguring a new DDS driv e on HP-UX. The DDS (\Digital Data Storage") T ap e Driv e is a sequen tial-access, read-write device using remo v able DDS cassettes. Although DDS d riv es are similar to D A T pla y ers in the audio industry , the cassettes are not in terc hangeable. There are t w o ma jor diîerences: 1. Audio cassette tap es transfer data in streaming mo de. That i s, they are left in motion for p erio ds of min utes. T ap es used for data are con tin ually starting, stopping and rep ositioning, whic h is stressful to the tap e. DDS tap es are made rugged enough to stand this kind of treatmen t. Audio tap es are not exp ected to p erform this w ell, and a s a result fail v ery quic kly in a data en vironmen t. 2. DDS cassettes ha v e a m uc h tigh ter case dimension sp eciîcation than D A T cassettes. As a result, D A T c assettes can get stuc k in a DDS driv e, requiring the driv e to b e disassem bled. F or this reason, only Hewlett-P ac k ard supp orted or prop erly certiîed DDS tap e cartridges should b e used. Use of D A Tt a p es in tended for audio use could v oid y our w arran t y . Caution Do not attempt to extricate a D A T cassette whic h is stuc k in aD D S driv e. Y ou ma y damage the driv e. Ha v e the driv e disassem bled b y someone qualiîed to do so. 6-24 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 The steps for adding a DDS tap e driv e to y our system are: 1. Mak e sure that the necessary device driv ers are conîgured in to the k ernel. SAM will mak e this test. 2. Cho ose a SCSI bus address for the new tap e driv e that do es not matc h the bus address for an y other SCSI device. 3. Sh ut y our system do wn and turn oî the p o w er. 4. Mak e all necessary hardw are connections for the device. 5. T urn the new tap e driv e on . 6. T urn y our system on . 7. Run SAM to create the device îles for the new tap e driv e. The factory-set SCSI address for the DDS driv e: F or an upgrade driv e: SCSI bus address: 3 As it is p ossible that the SCSI bus address jump ers for an upgrade ma y be shipp ed with diîeren t settings, please c hec k the settings b efore installing the device. See the Instal lation Guide for the device for information on resetting it, should it b e necessary . Configuring the Driv e on HP-UX The SAM N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Peripherals Devices ! N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Tape Drives pro cedure will conîrm whic h driv ers are activ e for y our tap e devices and will conîgure them as needed, for connected devices. Reconîguring the k ernel w ill in v olv e reb o oting y our system. Configuring H P-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es 6-25
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Before Y ou Begin: First mak e a note of the tap e driv e mo del and its hardw are address (SCSI bus address) so that y ou will b e able to iden tify i t later. DDS Driv eM o del: Bus Address: 1. Log in as root . 2. Run SAM b yt yping t he follo wing: $ /usr/bin/sam T o get help in SAM, pressing the 4 f1 5 k ey giv es y ou con text-sensitiv e information for the ob ject at the lo cation of the cursor. 3. Highligh t and select N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N Peripheral Devices -> 4. A t the next screen highligh t and select N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Tape Drives -> 5. The N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Tape Drive Manager screen lists what tap e devices are connected, including y our new device. Highligh t that device. 6. F rom the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N Actions men u, c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN Add... . A message screen giv es y ou the hardw are steps for adding the tap e driv e. Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . 7. A conîrmation screen indicates whether an y related device driv ers needed to b e added to the k ernel. Activ ate N N N N N NN NN NN Yes or press 4 Return 5 . 8. If y ou needed to add a device driv er, y ou will also need to create a new k ernel a nd (ev en tually) reb o ot the system. Select from the men u on the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Create a New K ernel screen whether y ou w an tt o create the new k ernel no w, later, or cancel the prop osed mo diîcations. (Mak e sure y our c hoice has an asterisk placed b yi t , b y p ressing N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N Return while that line is highligh ted.) Activ ate NNNNNNNN OK to conîrm y our c hoice of action. 9. Y ou will next b e giv en a c hoice of whether to install the new k ernel no w or later. If y ou mo v et h e k ernel i n to place n o w, the system will also reb o ot. I f y ou c ho ose to do it later, y ou can t hen mo v e t he new k ernel, /etc/conf/dfile.SAM to /hp-ux and r eb o o t. Y ou should also mo v e /etc/conf/dfile.SAM to /etc/conf/dfile at the s ame t ime. 6-26 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 If y ou reb o ot, the old k ernel will b e bac k ed up as /SYSBCKUP . 10. Exit SAM, if y ou ha v e not already done so. Note If y ou are mo difying a cluster clien t's k ernel, its k ernel is not bac k ed up, since /SYSBCKUP is used exclusiv ely for the cluster serv er's k ernel. Y our system is no w running the added driv er for SCSI DDS tap e driv e. Y ou are ready t o use the driv e to load a tap e in to y our system. T esting Y our Installation Note that a write-protect tab on the cassette allo ws y ou to protect data from b eing o v er-written. Y ou will need to mak e sure that the tab is mo v ed to the \writable" p osition in order for it to serv e as a bac k up medium. A simple test to mak e certain that ev erything has b een i nstalled satisfactorily is to load a tap e in the driv e, w ait for the \busy" ligh t to stop blinking, and execute the ioscan command: /etc/ioscan The LED on the driv e should îic k er brieîy . If the command completes successfully , a listing of y our devices, including the tap e hardw are address, name and status will b e displa y ed, indicating that it is installed correctly .N o t e that the command ma y fail with a busy error if the command is executed b efore the t ap eh a s completed loading. Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-27
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 DDS T ape Driv e LED Indicators Tw o LED indicators on the driv e's fron t panel indicate sev eral op erational and test states. The follo wing tables sho w the LED com binations and explains what they indicate. DDS T ape Driv e LED Symbols Used in T able 6-1 6-28 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 T able 6-1. DDS T ape Driv e LED State Codes Caution Indicator The DDS d riv e con tin ually m onitors the n um b e r o f e rrors i t h as to correct when reading or writing a tap e. This i nformation is presen ted to the u ser through t he Caution Indicator ( see a b o v ec hart). A caution indication has t w o common m eanings: The tap e heads need cleaning. The tap e i tself i s approac hing the e nd of its useful life. Configuring H P-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es 6-29
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Maximum Usage of DDS Cassettes Under optimal en vironmen tal conditions (50% relativ eh umidit y , 22 î C), Hewlett-P ac k ard DDS cassettes are curren tly sp eciîed to 2000 passes o v er an y part of the tap e. In op erational terms, this can be translated in to appro ximately 200 t o 300 bac kup o p erations. This tak es in to accoun t that, during a bac kup, an area of tap e ma y ha v e sev eral passes b ecause streaming cannot b e main tained, or b ecause the bac kup soft w are r equires that certain areas of the t ap ea r e accessed f requen tly . Under certain conditions, the recommended n um b er of bac kup op erations needs to b e reduced. These conditions are as follo ws: Sustained use at lo w h umidit y . Use in a lo w-p erformance w orkstation, requiring an increased n um b er of passes. Bac kup s oft w are requiring certain areas of the tap e b eing accessed frequen tly . As a guideline, HP recommends that the n um b er of bac kup op erations should b e limited to 100 p er cassette in extreme cases of the ab o v e conditions. In Case of Difficulty If y ou exp erience an y problems with the op eration of the new driv e, con tact y our HP service represen tativ e for assistance. 6-30 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 7 Dealing with Problems Chapter Contents In terpreting Error Messages During Bo ot. In terpreting the LED Indicators. Dealing with HP VUE P roblems. Re-Setting the VRX Sp ecial Device Files with mkno d. Managing a Bo ot F ailure. Reco v ering from a System P anic. Dealing with Net w ork F ailures. Dealing w ith P roblems 7-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Interpreting Error Messages During Boot When y ou turn on y our con troller, an error message suc h as the follo wing indicates that a hardw are problem with the Bo ot R OM or its asso ciated circuits o c curred: Configuration E EPROM Failed Configure Mode Failed Refer to T able 7-1 for p ossible error messages y ou ma y see when e n tering Conîguration Mo de. T able 7-1. Configuration Mode Entry Error Messages Error Message Meaning and Action (No error message) If Conîguration Mo de do es not start and no error message app ears, a hardw are failure probably o ccurred. Configure Mode Failed Configuration EEPROM Failed One or more of these situations exists: All of the in terface v alues ha v e b een set to their default (factory) v alues. Some default and some c hanged v alues ha v e b een set. All t he in terface v alues ha v e b een set to their c hanged v alues. Some minor error o ccurred that should not aîect the conîgurations for the in terface. Chec k the B o ot Mo de Selection and In terface Conîguration Mo des f or y our con troller a nd v erify they are correct f or y our a pplication. EEPROM Has Bad Information Conîguration M o d e s tarted, main men u ma y a pp ear, but s omething failed. T ry again. 7-2 Dealing w ith Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 T able 7-1. Configuration Mode Entry Error Messages (continued) Error Message Meaning and Action EEPROM Load Section Missing Could not load new conîguration data. Hardw are failure. EEPROM Defaults Section Missing Default conîgurations could not b e found. Hardw are failure. Too much data to save T o o man y in terfaces for EEPR OM to manage. Reconîgure con troller with few er in terfaces. If the Bo ot R OM or EEPR OM has problems after y ou en ter one of the conîguration commands (also see App endix A), the m o de lines displa y one of the error messages sho wn in the follo wing table. T able 7-2. Configuration Mode Exit Error Messages Command Error Message Meaning and Action N or D Too many configuration saves More than 64,000 sa v es w ere tried. Unlik ely to o c cur. N or D Cannot save new configuration Something prev en ted sa ving the new conîguration. Hardw are failure. Con tact y our HP Service Engineer. N or D EEPROM cannot save information EEPR OM ma y not sa v e an y or all of the new conîguration information. Hardw are failure. Con tact y our H P S ervice Engineer. A (No message s hould app ear) No error messages should app ear when y ou ab ort c onîguration mo de and reset y our c on troller. Dealing w ith P roblems 7-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Interpreting the LED Indicators There a re eigh t diagnostic LEDs on the system b oard, whic h y ou can view through a slot on the rear panel. Figure 7-1. Rear P anel Viewing Slot for Diagnostic LEDs These giv e normal indications for HP-UX when it is running, as sho wn in T able 7-3 . Some of these LEDs will alw a ys b e blinking during normal op eration. T able 7-3. Normal LED Displa y During HP-UX Operation LED Displa y (A through D Flashing) Meaning A B C D E F G H î î î î î î î î Op erating system running î î î î î î î î Disk access in progress î î î î î î î î Net w ork receiv e i n p rogress î î î î î î î î Net w ork t ransmit i n p rogress 7-4 Dealing w ith Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 The indications in T able 7-4 refer to conditions whic h migh t happ en during b o ot, including b o ot failures, b efor e HP-UX is running: T able 7-4. Diagnostic LED Displa y During Boot LED Displa y (During Bo ot) Status Remedy AB CD EF G H î î î î î î î î No failure. î î î î î î î î F ailed CPU register test. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î î î T esting the top 16 Kb yte of memory . î î î î î î î î T op 16 Kb yte of memory failed. î î î î î î î î T op 16 Kb yte of memory missing or not found. Chec k memory in slot 0 and 1 . î î î î î î î î Searc hing for user-supplied extension R OM. î î î î î î î î Started executing extension R OM instructions. î î î î î î î î Starting t est v ector list. î î î î î î î î Resetting all in terfaces. î î î î î î î î Searc hing for console displa y . Dealing w ith P roblems 7-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 T able 7-4. Diagnostic LED Displa y During Boot (continued) LED Displa y (During Bo ot) Status Remedy îî îî îî îî IODC test RAM under test. î î î î î î î î Console failure. Replace CPU b oard. î îî îî î î î F ailed Bo ot R OM c hec ksum. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î î î Preloading memory for main test. î î î î î î î î T esting memory . î î î î î î î î Insuîcien t memory . Replace slot 0 and 1 memory m o dule. î îî îî îî î R OM system failure. Replace R OM system. î î î î î î î î Bo ot error. Replace CPU b oard. îî î î î î î î Op erating system tried to load at to o high memory address. T ry b o oting again, or replace CPU or 68040 IC. î î î î î î î î Not enough memory to load op erating system. Add more memory . î î î î î î î î F ailure during system scan. î îî î î î î î 4 msec. timer problem. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î îî îî EEPR OM malformed. î îî îî îî î F ailure o f HP-HIL circuit. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î îî F ailure of HP-IB circuit. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î î î F ailure of DMA circuit. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î î î F ailure of DIO-I in terface at select co de iden tiîed b y îv e lo w est LEDs. Replace CPU b oard. 7-6 Dealing w ith Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Dealing with HP VUE Problems If y ou activ ate HP VUE and exp erience an y problems, it is probable that one of the follo wing is the source of the diîcult y . If no HP VUE login screen app ears: Log i n on y our system console, if p ossible. Start \Do ctor VUE" b y en tering the follo wing: /usr/contrib/bin/X11/dr_vue | more Examine the displa y ed output from dr_vue . It detects errors in v arious conîguration îles. There are sev eral reasons that HP VUE migh t fail to start: The îleset con taining HP VUE is not installed prop erly . The île that con trols system startup, /etc/inittab , ma y not b e conîgured prop erly . The X serv er has n ot started prop erly . The X serv er is sp eciîed in the île /usr/vue/config/Xservers . Dealing w ith P roblems 7-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Logging In With HP VUE When All Else F ails 1. Select N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N Options . 2. Cho ose NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Fail-safe S ession . 3. Select (highligh t) the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Login b o x. 4. T yp e y our login name. 5. Press 4 Return 5 . 6. T yp e y our passw ord. 7. Press 4 Return 5 or activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . When y ou log in to a fail-safe session, a windo w app ears with a command-line prompt in it, giving enough of an en vironmen ts o that y ou can use the command line to remedy problems or edit fault y conîguration îles. See the HP VUE User's Guide for more information. 7-8 Dealing w ith Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Re-Setting the VRX Special Device Files with mknod The sp ecial device île for the in ternal VRX graphics hardw are used in the Mo del 382 should already b e set up correctly as /dev/crt b y the s ystem bo ot co de. I f /dev/crt do es not exist, is deleted for some reason, or do es not allo w the device driv er access to the hardw are, use the information b elo w to create a new /dev/crt . The mknod command creates a sp ecial device île whic h is used to comm unicate be t w een the SPU and the in ternal graphics. Sup eruser status is required to set up sp ecial device îles. See the HP-UX R efer enc e , section 1M, for more information on the mknod command. The correct mknod command syn tax to create a DIO I I bus sp ecial device île for the in ternal En try Lev el VRX graphics hardw are is: mknod /dev/crt c 12 0x840300 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ | | | | -> 00 = (Use db y Starb ase) | | | ---> 03 = SGC-typ e c ar d | | -----> 84 = SGC slot numb er (=DIO SC 132 ) | ----------> 12 = Gr aphics devic e ------------> c = Char acter b ase d devic e Dealing w ith P roblems 7-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Managing a Boot F ailure The b o ot program is lo cated in the Bo ot R OM of y our con troller. Here are some things to c hec k if something has gone wrong at this p oin t in the b o ot pro cess: 1. Boot Program Initializes Hardw are Problems during this îrst stage of the b o ot pro cess are rare. A t this stage problems can b e caused b y: No p o w er to the con troller (c hec k y our building's circuit break ers and the p o w er connections to y our con troller equipmen t) Pro cessor hardw are failure In terface card hardw are failure Incorrectly connected in ternal SCSI cable. T urn oî the p o w er to the con troller (lea v e an y external disks p o w ered up and running). W ait îv e or ten seconds and turn the p o w er to the con troller bac k on. If the problem reo ccurs, record the symptoms, the status of an y indicators (esp ecially an y LED displa ys) on y our pro cessor, and an y messages that app ear on y our system console. A t this stage in the b o ot pro cess, most of the problems that oc c u r require y our hardw are to b e serviced b y a p erson trained and qualiîed to do so. 2. Boot Program Loads a Secondary Loader Program In this step the bo ot program attempts to load and run a secondary loader program t hat w ill b e c apable of loading and running HP-UX. The most lik ely problem at this stage is the b o o t p rogram b eing u nable t o l o c ate t he secondary loader program. If the b o ot program can't l o c ate a secondary loader, y ou will see t he message \ Searching For a System "i n t h e l o w er left corner of y our d ispla y .V erify that at least one device is p o w ered on and in a r eady state (it m ust also ha v ea Secondary Loader Program, o f c ourse). 7-10 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 This symptom could also indicate that no k ernel w as found (see the next phase for details). 3. Boot Program finds the WRONG secondary loader Another p ossible problem at this stage is that the b o ot program do es înd a secondary loader program, but the one it înds is the w rong one. On the Mo del 382, there is a particular sequence the b oo t program u ses to lo cate a secondary loader program. The b o ot program will use the îrst one it înds, and it ma y înd one b efore it reac hes the one y ou w an t it to use. It ma y also attempt to b o ot from in v alid disks whic h w ere laid out using newfs without the -n option. (See App endix A for the pro cedure for setting up automatic op erating s ystem selection.) If y ou are b o oting from a LAN where more than one v alid cluster serv er exists, the îrst serv er to resp ond is the one that y our system will b o ot from. It ma y b e unpredictable whic h serv er will resp ond îrst. Moreo v er, the one that resp onds ma y not b e the one y ou w an t. F or a serv er to resp ond to a b o ot request from y our system, it m ust ha v e y our con troller conîgured in its /etc/clusterconf île. Therefore, unless y our conîguration requires m ultiple op erating systems, y ou should nev er ha v e more than one serv er on y our LAN with your system deîned in its /etc/clusterconf île. 4. Secondary Loader Program Loads HP-UX A t t his stage, the secondary loader program attempts to load and start up HP-UX itself. There are t w o things that can go wrong: 1. The secondary loader program can't înd HP-UX 2. The secondary loader program loads the wrong v ersion of HP-UX 5. Secondary Loader P rogram can't find HP-UX The secondary loader program w ill displa y a list of the v alid k ernels that it înds. When it b e gins its searc h for these k ernels, it prin ts the message \ Searching For a System ". If it do esn't înd a n yv alid k ernels, nothing further will b e displa y ed. Dealing with Problems 7-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 If after a few min utes, nothing app ears to happ en, y our system probably can't înd a k ernel to b o ot. If y ou're certain that a v alid k ernel resides on one of y our devices, re-c hec k the status of the d evice (see the follo wing list \P ossible Problem Areas"). If y ou are attempting to b o ot from a lo cal device suc h as a disk driv e, and if the device is turned on and conîgured prop erly , y our k ernel île m a y b e missing or corrupted. I f y ou ha v e another system to whic h y ou can attac h the disk driv e, y ou can moun t the île system to that system and c hec k for the presence of a v alid k ernel. If y ou cannot înd o ne or if y ou do not ha v e another system to moun t y our disk on, y ou can re-install HP-UX follo wing the original installation pro cedures. Boot Device Problems The follo wing are p ossible b oo t device problems whic h could cause b o ot failure: The device is not p o w ered on and in a ready state. The device is not conîgured for the correct address (suc h as an HP-IB address). The cable connecting the device to the con troller is incorrect or not tigh tly connected to the correct lo cation. If y ou are attempting to b o ot an HP-UX clien t o v er a LAN, c hec k the follo wing: The cluster serv er is running. The rbootd daemon is running on the serv er. The cluster serv er has y our con troller conîgured in its /etc/clusterconf île. The LANIC i.d. îeld in /etc/clusterconf matc hes t he LAN i .d. found b y the B o o t R OM. The île /hp-ux is a Con text Dep enden t F ile (CDF). Also, b e s ure t here is an elemen t i n the CDF t hat corresp onds to the clien ty ou're t rying t o b o ot. 7-12 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 For M ore Information If y ou need more detail on b o oting or reconîguring y our system, please see System A dministr ation T asks or Solving HP-UX Pr oblems . Dealing w ith P roblems 7-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Reco v ering from a System P anic In HP-UX terms, a system panic simply means that the op erating system encoun tered a condition that it did not kno w ho w to resp ond to, so it halted y our con troller. System panics are rare and not alw a ys the result of a catastrophe. They sometimes o ccur at b o ot if y our system w as previously not sh ut do wn prop erly . Sometimes they o ccur as the result of a hardw are failure. In a clustered en vironmen t, a diskless clien t no de will panic if to o m uc h time has elapsed since its last comm unication with its serv er. This could b e the result of nothing more than a LAN cable that has b een disconnected for to o long. Reco v ering from a system panic can b e as simple as reb o oting y our system. If y ou ha v ea n up-to-date set of île system bac kup or system reco v ery tap es, the worst c ase scenario w ould in v olv e reinstalling HP-UX and restoring a n yî l e s that w ere lost or corrupted. If this situation w as caused b y a rare hardw are failure suc ha s ad i s k head crash, y ou will, of course, ha v e to ha v e the hardw are îxed b efore y ou can p erform the reinstallation. Note It is imp ortan t to main tain an up-to-date bac kup of the îles on y our system so that, in the ev en to f a disk head crash or similar situation, y ou can reco v er y our data. Ho w frequen tly y ou up date these bac kups dep ends on ho w m uc h data y ou can aîord to lose. F or information on ho wt o bac k up data, refer to System A dministr ation T asks . 7-14 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Should y our system ha v e this problem, it is imp ortan t to record and categorize the circumstances asso ciated with the panic: Summary Checklist of P ossible Causes of P anics Problem Area Some Correctiv e Actions: Hardw are If the failure app ears to b e asso ciated with the p e ripheral: Chec k the in tegrit y of the cable c onnections. Ensure that the p eripheral is online. If the ab o v ed i d not correct the problem, the failure ma y b e asso ciated with the System Pro c essing Unit. In this case, call y our designated service represen tativ e. File System Run the île s ystem c hec k er, fsck , to correct the problem. F ollo w the instructions that fsck ma y giv e, and use the -n option with an y subsequen t reb o ots required b y fsck . See Chapter 6 \File System Problems," in Solving HP-UX Pr oblems for detailed information. LAN Ensure the in tegrit y of all LAN connections, including taps in an y A UI cable. Chec k for prop er 50 ohm terminations at b oth ends of the LAN. Other Reb oo t the system Dealing w ith P roblems 7-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Procedures for Reco v ering from a System P anic Step 1: Note the P anic Message Record the panic message displa y ed on the system console. Step 2: Categorize the P anic Message The panic message will tell y ou wh y HP-UX panic k ed. Sometimes panic messages refer to in ternal structures of HP-UX (or its île systems) and the cause migh t not be ob vious. Generally , the problem is in one of the follo wing categories, and w ording of the message should allo w y ou to classify it in to one of them: Category Action Step Num b er Hardw are F ailure Step 3a File System Corrupted Step 3b LAN Comm unication Problem Step 3c Other S ituations Step 3d Step 3a: Reco v ery from Hardw are F ailure If the panic message indicated a hardw are failure, the text or con text of the message should indicate what piece of hardw are failed. If the hardw are failure app ears to b e a sso ciated with a p eripheral, c hec k to b e sure that its cables are tigh tly connected to their prop er lo cations and that the device is p o w ered o n and in an \online" state. If there is an error indicated on the device's displa y: 1. Keep a l og b o ok and record error messages i n it. 2. T urn the device o î. 3. If the device is a disk driv e, w ait f or it to stop spinning. 4. T urn the device b ac ko n . 7-16 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 If the problem reapp ears on the device or if the hardw are failure app ears to b e asso ciated with an in terface card or an in ternal comp onen t of the system mo dule, y ou should refer t he problem t o y our HP service represen tativ e. Pro ceed to Step 4 ( \Reb o oting Y our System"). Step 3b: Reco v ering from a File System Problem If the panic message indicates a problem with one of y our île s ystems, y ou will need t o run t he île system c hec k er fsck (1m) to c hec k and correct the problem(s). This is normally done automatically at b o ot time (from the /etc/rc île) so y ou should pro ceed to step 4 (reb o oting y our s ystem). F ollo w all directions that fsck giv es y ou esp e cial ly if it is your r o ot île system (the one with the \/" d ir e ctory) that has the pr oblem . It is imp ortan t to use the \ -n " option to the r eb o ot (1m) command if requested to do so b y fsck during an y subsequen t reb o ot. Step 3c: Reco v ering from a LAN Communication Problem If the panic messages i ndicates a problem with LAN comm unication (suc h as when a diskless cluster clien t no de is prev en ted from comm unication for to o long), c hec k all LAN cable connections to b e sure of the follo wing: All connectors are tigh tly fastened to the LAN cable and the media access units (MA U's). LAN is assem bled correctly and d o es not exceed recommended lengths. If y ou use an A UI, the LAN m ust b e connected dir e ctly to the MA U with no in terv ening length of cable b et w een the MA U on y our con troller to the LAN tee. Y our LAN is prop erly terminated. Pro ceed to step 4 (reb o oting y our system). Step 3d: R eco v ering from Other Situations When y ou susp e ct the p roblem w as something other t han the a b o v e ( or when y ou do not k no w where to classify it), p ro ceed t o s tep 4 \ R eb o oting your system ." In this case, it is esp e cial ly imp ortan t that y ou write do wn the exact text of the p anic message, just in case y ou need it for future troublesho o ting or help from H P s ervice p e rsonnel. Dealing w ith P roblems 7-17
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Step 4: Rebooting Y our System Once y ou ha v e c hec k ed for and corrected an y problems from Step 3, y ou are ready to reb o ot y our system. If y our system h as not gotten past the system selection phase of the bo ot pro cess, i t is safe to turn it oî and then bac k on to initiate the b o ot sequence. Y ou will probably notice a few diîerences in b o ot b eha vior as compared with y our normal b o ot sequence. Y our con troller migh th a v e sa v ed a \core" île to disk. This core île is a \ snapshot" of the previously running k ernel at the time that it panic k ed. If necessary , this core île can b e analyzed using sp ecial to ols to determine what caused the panic. Note Core îles a re quite large and are sa v ed to the directory /tmp/syscore . If y ou feel y ou need to sa v e these îles for future analysis (something that isn't usually required), it is b est to sa v e them to tap e and remo v e them from y our île system in order to free up space. If y ou know wh y y our system panic k ed, y ou can delete the core îles; it is unnecessary to k eep them. The core îles are used in rare circumstances to diagnose hard-to-înd causes of system panics. If the reason y our system panic k ed w as b ecause of a corrupted île system, the fsck utilit y will rep ort the errors and an y corrections it mak es. If the problems w ere asso ciated with y our ro ot île system, fsck will return a message to reb oo t y our system when it is înished. In this case, use the follo wing command: reboot -n The -n option tells the reboot command not to sync the île system b efore reb o oting. Since fsck has made all the corrections on disk, y ou do not w an t to undo the c hanges b y writing o v er them with t he corrupt m emory buîers. Step 5: Monitor the system closely If y our system successfully b o ots, y ou can r esume normal op erations. Man y system p anics are isolated ev en ts and are unlik ely to reo ccur. 7-18 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Chec k y our applications to b e sure that they are running prop erly and monitor the system closely . Y ou should also do bac kups more frequen tly un til y ou are conîden t that the system is functioning prop erly . For Further Information . . . See Solving HP-UX Pr oblems and System A dministr ation T asks for further information on problems relating to the op erating system. T o restore a corrupted op erating system, see the pro cedures for restoring in Chapter 5 of this man ual. Dealing w ith P roblems 7-19
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Dealing with Netw ork F ailures If the program y ou ha v e b een running uses resources from a lo cal area net w ork and it stops unexp ectedly , the follo wing ma y h elp lo cate the s ource of the problem: T able 7-5. Problems with the Netw ork Problem Action No systems resp ond to the /etc/ping hostname command. Chec k the net w ork connection at the bac k of y our w orkstation. Mak e sure that the cable is securely fastened to the appropriate connector. Y our s ystem do es not resp ond t o /etc/ping from another system on the net w ork. Chec kt o see if the net w orking soft w are is still running on y our system. If it is not running, restart i t b y logging on to y our system as sup eruser and running /etc/rc . Some systems resp ond to /etc/ping , but others do not. Con tact y our net w ork administrator, if y ou ha v e one. This condition either indicates that s ome systems are do wn, or that there is a fault with the net w ork. 7-20 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A A Configuring the Boot ROM Appendix Contents Using the Bo ot R OM Conîguration Mo de for HP-UX Conîguring for Automatic Op erating System Selection Configuring the Boot ROM A-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A Using the Boot ROM Configuration Mode The Bo ot R OM conîguration mo de is used for in ternal in terface conîgurations or Auto System Selection for y our con troller. Conîgure Mo de is run and con trolled b yt h e Bo ot R OM. Y ou do not need to ha v ea n op erating system i nstalled to use Conîgure Mo de. If the op erating system is installed and y ou w an t to en ter Conîgure Mo de, y ou m ust prev en t the op erating system from b o oting. Instructions are pro vided in this c hapter. 1 T urning on y our monitor and y our con troller. The p o w er-up displa y will app ear. 2 If y our HP-UX op erating system has b een installed, y ou m ust prev en tt h e op erating system from b o oting shortly after turning y our con troller on. As so on as the follo wing line app ears in y our p o w er-up displa y press t he 4 space ba r 5 to prev en t HP-UX from b o oting: ... HP-HIL.Keyboard (Y ou wil l he ar a double-b e ep) ... Y ou will still see the p o w er-up displa y , but HP-UX will not b o ot. 3 With the p o w er-up displa y sho wn on y our monitor, press these k eys t o en ter Conîguration Mo de: 4 C 5 4 Return 5 A-2 Configuring the Boot ROM
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A 4 Y ou should see this men u app ear in the upp er righ t-hand corner of the p o w er-up displa y: Configuration Control Keys Control Class ----------------------- 1 I/O Configuration 2 Auto System Selection A Abort without changes ----------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? The ? prompt b elo w the men u indicates y our con troller is w aiting for an input. T o resp ond, press an appropriate n um b er or letter k ey , follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . If y ou no w w an t to c hange the I/O conîguration of y our con troller, go on to the next section. If y ou w an t to lea v e Conîguration Con trol without making an yc hanges, en ter \ A " follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . The system will reset and run the p o w er-up self test. Configuring t he Boot ROM A-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A Modifying I/O Configuration Information Conîguration settings are stored in a part of memory called an EEPR OM (\Electronically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory"). Information stored in the EEPR OM remains in tact ev en when y our con troller is turned oî. T able A-1 lists the factory-set default c onîgurations for y our E EPR OM. T able A-1. Built-In Interface Default V alues Built-In In terface F unction Default Conîguration Options SCSI Select Co de 14 0 to 31 In terrupt Lev el 4 3 to 6 Bus Address 7 0 to 7 P arit y Y es Y es/No LAN Select Co de 21 0 to 31 In terrupt Lev el 5 3 to 6 HP P arallel Select Co de 12 0 to 31 In terrupt Lev el 3 3 to 6 HP-IB System-Con troller option y es y es/no RS232 Select Co de 9 0 to 31 in terrupt lev el 5 3 to 6 Remote/Lo cal L R or L Mo dem Enable y es y es/no F ollo w these instructions to en ter and use I/O Conîguration Men u. En ter the follo wing: 1 4 Return 5 A-4 Configuring the Boot ROM
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A This Conîgurable In terfaces men u replaces the Conîguration Con trol men u: Configurable Interfaces Keys Interface Select Code ---------------------------- 1 LAN 21 2 HP-IB 3 SCSI 14 4 HP Parallel 12 5 RS-232 9 N store New values D store Default values (then cycle SPU power) A A bort without changes ---------------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? Eac h of the three commands is explained b elo w. P ossible Resp onse F unction and Meaning 4 N 5 Stores all the listed new v alues y ou en tered in the E EPR OM. Y ou can turn oî y our con troller, and then turn it bac k on, and the new v alues will b e u sed. The system resets and runs the p o w er-up self test. 4 D 5 Exits the Conîguration Mo de and stores t he factory d efault v alues in the EEPR OM. Y ou m ust cycle con troller p o w er to reconîgure the in terfaces to these default v alues. 4 A 5 Causes the Bo ot R OM to reset and run the p o w er-up s elf-test without sa ving an y c hanges y ou ma y ha v e made to the in terface v alues. The pre-existing v alues will b e used. En ter y our r esp onse follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 after the ? prompt. If y ou decide to use the default c onîgurations, exit the m en ub y p ressing D follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . Configuring the Boot ROM A-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A Configuring for Automatic Operating System Selection Y ou will probably w an t to lea v e this feature in its default setting unless an yo f the follo wing applies: Tw oo r more op erating systems are a v ailable on y our con troller Y our w orkstation is connected to a net w ork that con tains m ultiple serv ers. Y ou need to b e able to auto b oo t from a diîeren t op erating system from that used b y other no des. If an y of these conditions is true, follo w these steps to en ter and use Auto System Selection: A-6 Configuring the Boot ROM
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A 1 With Conîguration Con trol men u in the upp er-righ t corner of the screen, en ter 2 4 Return 5 . Configuration Control Keys Control Class ----------------------------- 1 I/O Configuration 2 Auto System Selection A Abort without changes ---------------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? 2 This men ua p p ears: Auto System S election Keys Option Status ---------------------------- 1 Scan for System Y 2 Selected System N 3 Store Selected Sys. N E Execute A Abort without changes ----------------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? 3 The prompt ? indicates that y our con troller is w aiting for a letter or n um b er input. The Auto System Selection men u indicates the w a y y our system is curren tly set. T oggling the \Status" o ptions b y en tering one of the n um b ers under \Keys" on the left will result in a new conîguration whic h will be executed as so on as y ou press E .A t t hat p o in t t he system resets and runs the p o w er-up s elf test. F or example, if y our disks c on tain more than one o p e rating system, y ou could c ho ose o ne as the S elected System b y p ressing 2 , f ollo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . Configuring the Boot ROM A-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A 4 The Auto System Selection men u c hanges to indicate N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Selected System , N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN Scan for System , and N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N Store Selected Sys. are all Y (\y es"). Auto System Selection Keys Option Status ---------------------------- 1 Scan for System Y 2 Selected System Y 3 Store Selected Sys. Y E Execute A Abort w ithout changes ----------------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? 5 T o execute the men u as it app ears in the previous step, press E , follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . The system will giv e y ou the opp ortunit y to iden tify the \Selected System" in the next step. If y ou decide not to c hange the Auto System Selection conîguration, press A to lea v e the conîguration unc hanged. The system resets and r uns the p o w er-up self test. 6 If y ou pressed E , the system resets and runs the p o w er-up self test. Y our p o w er-up displa y will c hange, and the a v ailable op erating systems w ould b e listed in the upp er righ t-hand corner lik e this: Copyright 1991 :(device, select code/address, unit) Hewlett-Packard Company 1H SYSTEM_HPUX All Rights Reserved (other systems) BOOTROM Rev. 3.01 2 MAY 91 MC68040 Processor Configuration EEPROM HP-HIL.Keyboard A-8 Configuring the Boot ROM
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A 7 The n um b er-letter designation for the op erating system y ou will select is 1H . En ter that preîx b y t yping 1H 4 Return 5 . That op erating system will b o ot. If y ou do not en ter this information, the Bo ot R OM will designate the îrst system it scans as the \Selected System". If y ou previously set the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N Store Selected Sys. option to \y es," the op erating system selected will b e the one to automatically b o ot eac h time y ou turn on y our con troller. This completes the selection pro cess, and the system will no w pro ceed w ith b o oting the selected system for this and future sessions. For More Information See \In terpreting Error Messages D uring Bo ot" Chapter 7 for additional guidance if y ou exp erience problems during this pro cess. Configuring the Boot ROM A-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary Glossary absolute path name The name of a île whic h lists all the directories leading to it, starting with ro ot (\/") and ending with the île base name itself. If the path name indicates a dir e ctory , lea v et h e trailing s lash. F or example, /users/jth/ . access p ermissions File name c haracteristics (including r e ad, write , and exe cute ) whic h determine whether a pro cess can p erform a requested op eration on the île (suc h as op ening a île for writing). Access p ermissions can b e c hanged b y a chmo d (1) command. activ ate In SAM or HP VUE, to cause a g raphical con trol, suc h as N N N N N N N N OK to tak e eîect b y clic king the mouse while t he p oin ter is o v er that con trol, or, on a c haracter terminal, b y illuminating the con trol (using arro w k eys, etc.) and pressing 4 Return 5 . activ e windo w The windo w in whic hk eyb oard input a pp ears. Only one windo w can b e activ e at a time. The activ e windo w is said to ha v e the k eyb oard fo cus. application A program used t o p erform a p articular task, usually in teractiv ely ,s u c ha s computer-aided design, text editing, or accoun ting. argumen t The p art o f a command line w hic hi d e n tiîes what (île, directory , e tc.) is to be acted u p o n. Glossary-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary ARP A/Berk eley host name A system name assigned to eac h system that supp orts ARP A services. ASCI I American Sym b olic Co de for Information In terc hange bac kground pro cess A p rogram, usually l o w p riorit y , run non-in teractiv ely b y the shell without terminal I/O, while other pro cessing o ccupies the terminal. The \&" at the end of a command line causes that command to be run a s ab a c kground pro cess. bac kup Ac o p yo f all or part o f the île system. bit BInary digiT b o ot T o start or activ ate a system. b oo t R OM A read-only memory whic h is incorp orated in to a terminal for the purp ose starting the op erating system, testing the terminal, and pro ducing a standard displa y . Bourne Shell A command in terpreter, in v ok ed as /bin/sh . The Bourne Shell is the default shell in HP-UX. BSD Berk eley Soft w are Distribution. bus address An um be r w h i c h mak es up part of the a ddress HP-UX u ses to lo cate a particular d evice. The bus address is determined b y a switc h setting on a p eripheral device w hic h a llo w s t he computer to distinguish b e t w een t w o devices connected t o t he same in terface. Glossary-2
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary button A graphic elemen t in a displa y that functionally represen ts an actual push button. It is usually a ccessible b y mouse p oin ter and is used to start an action. C A standardized and highly-p ortable computer language. Also the name of the NLS default language/en vironmen t (formerly n-computer). Also the name of one of the HP-UX command in terpreters, the C Shell ( csh ). CD-R OM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory . CD R OM île system A read-only memory île system on compact disk. T ypically , y ou can r ead data from a CD R OM île system, but y ou cannot write to one. c haracter An elemen t used for the organization, con trol, or represen tation of text. Characters include graphic c haracters and con trol c haracters. c ho ose In HP VUE or SAM, to cause a selection to tak e eîect, b y clic king on it t wice or b y pressing return with the selection illuminated. clic k T o press and r ele ase a mouse button rapidly . cluster A group of w orkstations connected via a LAN. One computer, the cluster serv er , p e rforms as a île-system serv er for the cluster clien ts . (F or information on clusters, see Managing Clusters of HP9000 Computers: Sharing the HP-UX Filing System ). cluster clien t A cluster n o d e t hat do es not ha v e a lo cal H P-UX île system. Its î le system resides o n the cluster serv er. Ho w ev er for HP-UX 8.0, cluster clien ts can ha v e l o cally moun ted disks for lo cal d ata s torage. A clien t can also refer to an y pro cess r un b y a serv er. Glossary-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary cluster no de An y w orkstation net w ork ed in to an HP-UX cluster. (Also called \cno de".) cluster serv er The cluster no de whic h acts as aî l e system serv er and op erating system serv er for all the cluster n o des in an HP-UX cluster. Also called cluster ro ot serv er . cno de Abbreviation for cluster no de . CPU Cen tral Pro cessing Unit. The instruction-pro cessing mo dule of the computer. Se e also SPU . cron A pro cess whic h executes commands at sp eciîed dates and times. C Shell An HP-UX command in terpreter, in v ok ed as csh . curren t session The HP-UX o r HP VUE session to whic h y ou are logged in at a particular time. curren t w orking directory The directory in whic h relativ e path name searc hes b egin. It is also c alled the \curren t directory" or \w orking directory", and is iden tiîed b y en tering the command pwd . device île A île used for the computer to comm unicate with a device suc h as a tap e driv e o r a prin ter. DDS Digital Data Storage. HP-supp orted \ D A T" format for data storage. dialog b o x A sub windo w o f a n a pplication used to request information, o r t o d ispla y status or error c onditions. Glossary-4
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary DIO Device input/output. directory A table of iden tiîers and references (suc ha s île n ames) that refer to corresp o nding îles and items of data. Used in a t ypical HP-UX organizational structure to pro vide an organizational and logical iden tit y for a giv en group of îles and directories. In HP VUE, a directory i s sometimes called a \ folder." double clic k Pressing and releasing a mouse button t wice in rapid succession. F or HP VUE, \double clic k" an icon. drag Pressing and holding do wn a mouse button while mo ving the mouse po i n ter. drop Releasing an icon that has b een \dragged" to a new p osition b y release the mouse button. en vironmen t The set of deîned shell v ariables (some of whic ha r e P A TH, TERM, SHELL, HOME) that deîne the conditions under whic h y our commands run. These conditions can i nclude y our terminal c haracteristics, home directory , and default searc h path. expander In terface hardw are for additional DIO cards. One or t w o expander b o xes can be stac k ed on top o f a system unit and connected directly to it or to another expander on whic h it is placed. île access p ermissions File name c haracteristics (including r e ad, w rite ,a n d exe cute ) whic h determine whether a pro c ess c an p erform a r equested op eration on the î le (suc h a s o p e ning a î le for w riting). Access p e rmissions can b e c hanged b ya chmo d (1) c ommand. Glossary-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary File Manager The HP VUE comp onen t that allo ws y ou to manipulate y our î les and directories, or to set t he format and b eha vior of HP VUE. îleset Describ es a logically-deîned, named set o f îles on an up date or installation tap e. île system The organization of îles on a giv en storage device, p ossibly including hierarc hical directories. foreground pro cess The pro cess o ccup ying the c urren tly activ e terminal I/O, whic h ma y b e a windo w. The shell will not return a prompt un til a foreground pro cess has înished executing. F ron t P anel The windo w area of a default HP VUE screen whic h con tains some accessories, suc h as the clo c k, and the con trol buttons for activ ating v arious functions of the w orkspace manager program, suc h as prin t, terminal, st yle manager, and trash. group An asso ciation of users who are all p ermitted to access the same set of îles. The mem b ers of ag r o u p are deîned in the îles /etc/passwd , /etc/group , and /etc/logingroup (if it exists) via an umerical group ID. U sers with iden tical group IDs are mem b ers of the same group. group access list The group access list i s as e t of supplemen tary group IDs, asso ciated with a pro cess, used in determining resource accessibilit y . $HOME The v alue of the e n vironmen tv ariable represen ting t he home directory . home directory The directory name giv en b y the v alue of the s hell v ariable HOME. This i s the directory where the user starts a fter logging in, t ypically /users/ lo gin , where lo gin is y our l ogin name. Glossary-6
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary home session An HP VUE user-conîgured default session. Unless y ou sp ecify otherwise, the home session is restored eac h time y ou log in. host name Refers to a string whic h uniquely iden tiîes a system in a net w ork. There are generally diîeren t host name domains asso ciated with diîeren t net w orks. HP-HIL Hewlett-P ac k ard Human In terface Link. HP-IB Hewlett-P ac k ard In terface Bus (IEEE 488 standard). HP-UX cluster A group of w orkstations connected via a LAN. One computer, the cluster serv er , p e rforms as a île-system serv er for the cluster clien t . Cluster can also b e used b y itself if the con text is clear. \Diskless cluster" should not b e used. HP VUE HP Visual User En vironmen t. icon A miniaturized graphic represen tation of a windo w in the w orkspace (t ypically an application windo w). Pro cesses executing in a windo w con tin ue to execute when the windo w is iconiîed. IEEE Institute of Electrical and E lectronics Engineers, and the in terface format whic h b ears its name. ITE The I n ternal T erminal Em ulator program, w hic h allo ws a b it-mapp e d displa y t o f unction a s a standard computer terminal. k ernel The p art o f t he HP-UX o p e rating system t hat i s resp onsible for managing the c omputer's r esources. Glossary-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary k eysh The command for in v oking a Key Shell. Key Shell An HP-UX shell whic h, as an extension of the Korn Shell, uses hierarc hical softk ey men us and con text-sensitiv e help to aid users in building command lines. In v ok ed as usr/bin/keysh . Korn Shell An HP-UX shell, featuring command history recall and line-editing. In v ok ed as /bin/ksh . LAN Se e Lo cal Area Net w ork . LANG An NLS en vironmen t v ariable that is used to inform a computer pro cess of the user's requiremen ts for \native language," \lo cal customs," and \co ded c haracter set." This v ariable can b e set at login b y clic king on the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Options men u in the HP VUE Login screen. LED Ligh t-emitting dio de. Lo cal Area Net w ork The systems and/or clusters whic h share data, hardw are, and s oft w are resources via Net w orking Services soft w are. lo cally-moun ted île system A île system moun ted on a disk attac hed to a cluster clien t and shared b y other no des in the cluster. login Y our login n ame, the n ame b y whic hy ou are k no wn to the w orkstation. This ma yb e a n y g roup of c haracters, so long as it meets system rules. maximize The function of enlarging a w indo w t o its largest size. OSF/Motif windo w managers, s uc h a s the HP VUE W orkspace M anager, pro vide this function. A lso se e minimize and restore . Glossary-8
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary men u bar An area at the top of a windo w that con tains the p ull do wn men us for that application. minimize The function o f reducing a windo w to an icon. OSF/Motif windo w managers|suc h as the HP VUE W orkspace Manager|pro vide this function. A lso se e restore . mnemonic A single c haracter used as a k eyb oard shortcut for a SAM or VUE command. Usually , a command's mnemonic is its initial letter. The screen indicates a mnemonic c haracter b y u nderlining or illuminating the c haracter. moun t T o add a n auxiliary (remo v able) île system to an activ e existing île system. moun t directory The directory in an existing île system that is the ro ot directory of a moun ted auxiliary île system. m ultiuser state The condition of the HP-UX op erating system in whic ht h e cluster no des (and console) allo w comm unication b et w een the system and all its users. Nativ e Language Supp ort (NLS) A feature o f HP-UX t hat pro vides the user with in ternationalized soft w are and the application programmer with to ols to dev elop this soft w are. NFS Net w ork File Services. NFS île s ystem A î le system accessible o v er a n et w ork via the N FS Services pro duct. no de name A unique s tring u sed to iden tify e ac h n o d e i n a cluster. Glossary-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary op erating system The con ten ts of /hp-ux , including the k ernel, commands, input-output con trol, system accoun ting, storage a ssignmen t, and other services. A lso se e k ernel . OSF Op en Soft w are F oundation. o wner The o wner of a île is usually the creator of that île. Ho w ev er, the o wnership of a île can b ec hanged b y the sup eruser or the curren t o wner with the chown(1) command or the chown(2) system call. paren t pro cess ID A paren t pro cess iden tiîcation. A lso se e PID . passw ord An encrypted sequence of c haracters used b y HP-UX to iden tify an authorized user and to p ermit authorized login on a system. path name (Tw o w ords, except as an italicized argumen t, p athname .) A sequence of directory names, separated b y slashes, whic h sp ecify the lo cation of an y île or directory . PID Pro c ess iden tit y (n um b er). p op-up men u A men u that remains in visible un til a user action or some condition in the program causes t he men u to displa y . T ypically the user either presses the \men u button" on the mouse (a common default is button 3), o r presses the \men uk ey" on the k eyb oard (a common default is F10). POSIX POrtable Systems I n terface ( for U N*X). U N*X s tandard from IEEE. P osix Shell POSIX-complian tv ersion of the Korn Shell. Glossary-10
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary ppid P aren t pro cess ID. pro cess An in v o cation of a program. Generally , pro c ess refers to a p rogram running in memory , while program is the co de stored on disk. pro c ess ID A unique iden tiîcation n um b er assigned to all pro cesses b y the op erating system. A lso se e PID. pt y Pseudo-terminal. RAM random-access memory . regular expression A string of c haracters that selects text. relativ e path name The name of a île, listing all the directories leading to that île in relation to the curren t w orking directory . restore The function of returning a windo w to its n ormal size from a maximize d or minimize d state. OSF/Motif windo w managers, suc h as the HP VUE W orkspace M anager, pro vide this function. Se e minimize and maximize . R OM read-only memory . ro ot directory The highest l ev el directory of the hierarc hical î le system, from whic h all other îles branc h. In HP-UX, the s lash ( / )c haracter refers to the \ ro ot directory ." The ro ot directory i s t he only directory in the île s ystem t hat is its o wn \paren t d irectory ." Glossary-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary ro ot île system The île system moun ted on the cluster serv er. ro ot serv er The no de in a cluster to whic ht h e storage device con taining the r o ot île system of the cluster is ph ysically attac hed. A lso cluster serv er . ro ot user The user with ro ot p ermission, ha ving a separate \ro ot" accoun t and passw ord, and w orking with the Bourne Shell, as the default shell. run-lev el The system state determined at b o ot whic h deînes, among other things, m ulti- or single-user status. SAM System Administration Manager. A subsystem of HP-UX that helps y ou to do a wide range o f system administration tasks in teractiv ely . script A île that con tains commands that a shell can in terpret and run. scroll bar In graphical in terfaces, a graphical device used to scroll data displa y ed in a windo w. A scroll bar consists of a slider, scroll area, and scroll arro ws. SCSI Small Computer System In terface. select In HP VUE or SAM, to illuminate an item in a form or men ub y using the mouse p oin ter and clic king on the item, or, on a c haracter terminal, b y mo ving the i lluminated area using the a rro wk eys, etc. serv er A c omputer p rogram that pro vides île access, login access, île transfer, prin ting and other services across a net w ork. Sometimes, but n ot alw a ys, a serv er consists o f a dedicated computer. Glossary-12
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary session The time b et w een logging in and logging out. shell An HP-UX command in terpreter (Bourne, Korn, Key ,P osix or C), pro viding a w orking en vironmen t in terface for the user. The shell tak es command input from the k eyb oard and in terprets it for the op erating system. shell script A île that con tains commands that a shell can in terpret and run. Also \shell program." sh ut do wn T o tak e the system from m ulti-user state to a s tate in whic h no pro cesses are running, using the shutdown command. single-user state The state of a computer where there is little or no pro cess activit y and no users logged in. The system is only accessible to the curren t system administrator (ro o t). This mo de is brough t ab out b y execution of shutdown (1). Also called single-user mo de . SPU System Pro cessing Unit. The instruction-pro cessing mo dule of the computer. standalone A computer whic h is not part of a cluster. standard error The destination of error and sp ecial messages from a program, in tended to b e used for diagnostic messages. The s tandard error output is often called stderr , and i s automatically o p e ned b y t he shell for writing o n î le descriptor 2 for e v ery c ommand in v ok ed. S tandard e rror usually a pp ears on the d ispla y u nless i t i s d irected otherwise. standard i nput The s ource of input data for a p rogram. The s tandard input île is often Glossary-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary called stdin , and is automatically op ened b y the shell for reading on île descriptor 0 for ev ery command in v ok ed. standard output The destination of output data from a program. The standard output île is often called stdout ,a n d is automatically op ened b y the shell for writing on île descriptor 1 for ev ery command in v ok ed. Standard output app ears on the displa y unless it is redirected otherwise. SU Sup er User. Se e ro ot user . system name The eigh t-c haracter (or l ess) string whic h uniquely iden tiîes a system. Usually iden tical with the system's host name found in /etc/hosts .T h e In ternet Proto col (IP) n um b er is sometimes used instead of a system name to iden tify the system. timeout Deactiv ation of a device or system after a pre-set time. title bar The rectangular area at the top of a windo w that con tains the title of the windo w (for example, \T erminal Windo w" or \File M anager"). In OSF/Motif windo w managers, suc h as the HP VUE W orkspace Manager, the title bar can a lso be used with the mouse p oin ter to mo v e (\drag") the windo w to a new lo cation. Also called \men u bar". T o olb o x A sp ecial HP VUE File Manager view for managing applications and other soft w are. Sub-t yp es of to olb o xes accessed with the T oo l b o x slideup panel are: P ersonal, General, Net w ork, and M ark etplace. tree structure The HP-UX metho d of organizing îles and d irectories in to a h ierarc hical structure. This structure l o oks lik e a n i n v erted tree with the \ro ot" directory at the t op, d escending in to m ultiple directory/île branc hes that end in clusters of îles. Glossary-14
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary uid User ID. user An y p erson who in teracts directly with a computer system. user in terface The m edium through w hic h u sers comm unicate with their w orkstations. The command-line prompt is one t yp e of in terface. The graphical ob jects of HP VUE are another t yp e of in terface. user ID An in teger whic h iden tiîes eac h system user. VUE Visual User En vironmen t. windo w A f rame-deîned, rectangular area of the screen used b y the HP VUE to con tain a particular application or a command l ine. Clien t applications can ha v e m ultiple windo ws. windo w men u The men u in the upp er-left corner of an HP VUE windo w frame. w orking directory This is the directory in whic h relativ e path name searc hes b egin. It is also called the curren t d irectory , or the curren t w orking directory . w orkspace The en tire area of the displa y screen when HP VUE starts u p. T o switc h from one w orkspace to another, y ou c ho ose the corresp onding w orkspace button in the F ron tP anel. w orkstation A îexible, graphics-orien ted c omputer, generally h igh-sp eed a nd high-capacit y , d esigned for u se in a v ariet y of industrial s ituations. Glossary-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index Index 3 382 features built-in in terfaces, 1-3 general, 1-1 graphics, 1-3 hardw are arc hitecture, 1-7 HP-HIL in terface, 1-6 HP P arallel p ort, 1-6 HP-UX op erating systems, 1-8 in ternal mass storage, 1-7 k eyb oard, 1-6 LAN, 1-6 memory, 1-3 RS-232 in terface, 1-6 SCSI in terface, 1-6 supp orted in ternal mass storage devices, 1-7 supp orted monitors, 1-3 A arc hiving, 5-2 , 6-15 automatic system selection, A-6 B bac king u p, 5-2 {12 DDS tap e , 5 -2 îexible disk, 6-15 imp ortance of, 7-14 restoring data, 5-7 bac kups, 7-18 restoring data, 5-8 Basic do cumen ts, 2 -3 /bin/ksh , 4-4 /bin/posix/sh , 4-4 /bin/sh , 4-4 b o oting en tering information, 3-2 b o oting from LAN, 7-11 b o ot problems, 7-10 b o ot program, 7-10 Bo ot R OM conîguration men u, A-5 conîguration men u , A-6 conîguring, A-2 , A-4 error messages, 7-2 information, 2-3 in terface defaults, A-4 startup information, 3-2 Bourne Shell, 4-3 , 4-5 bus IDs determining activ e SCSI, 6-7 C cables, 7-16 CD R OM as system bac kup, 5-2 installing, 6-18 {23 moun ting, 6 -21 SCSI bus a ddress, 6 -18 testing i nstallation, 6-21 Cen tronics p ort, 1-6 c hanging a passw ord, 3-7 c hanging y our shell, 4-5 chsh ,4 - 5 Index-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index command line logging in, 3-3 new user accoun t, 3-5 prompt, 4-2 setting passw ord, 3-3 sh utting d o wn, 3-11 using, 3-3 , 4-1 commands chsh , 4-5 cp ,4 - 9 diskinfo , 6-14 echo , 4-4 exit , 3-10 , 4-5 , 4-23 fsck , 7-15 , 7-17 , 7-18 ftp , 4-17 , 4-18 , 4-20 ioscan , 6-14 lock , 3-10 lp , 4-12 lsf , 4-8 man , 4-7 mkdir , 4-8 mkrs , 5-2 , 5-3 , 5-4 more , 4-12 mount , 6-16 , 6-17 , 6-21 mv , 4-9 passwd , 3-7 , 3-8 rcp , 4-17 , 4-20 , 4-21 , 4-22 reboot , 7-17 , 7-18 reboot , -n option, 7-17 , 7-18 rlogin , 4-17 , 4-23 rm , 4-10 rm -rf dirname , 4-11 shutdown , 3-11 umount , 6-17 , 6 -22 whoami , 4-2 conîguration Bo ot R OM, A -4 conîguring Bo ot R OM, A -2 Bo ot R OM men u, A-3 CD R OM, 6-18 {23 DDS driv e, 6-24 {27 îexible disk driv e, 6-12 hard disk driv e jump ers, 6-8 HP-UX for a hard disk driv e, 6-8 prin ter f or HP-UX, 6-3 connectors, 1-3 Con text Dep enden t Files /hp-ux , 7 -12 con troller installation do cumen ts, 2-2 op erating tasks, 2-4 cop y remotely, 4-18 , 4-19 , 4-21 , 4-22 core dumps, 7-18 correcting t yping mistak es with 4 Back space 5 , 4-2 cp , 4-9 crash reco v ery b o ot from reco v ery tap e, 5-10 creating a reco v ery system, 5-2 creating directories with mkdir ,4 - 8 C shell, 4-3 D data protecting, 5-2 restoring individual îles, 5-7 DDS driv e conîguring, 6-24 {27 LEDs, 6-28 DDS tap e cautions, 6-30 maxim um usage, 6-30 reco v ery systems, 5 -2 deînitions, t erms, G lossary-1 {15 deleting a î le with rm , 4 -10 determining a ctiv e b us IDs, 6-7 device address, 7-12 diagnostic i ndicators, 7-5 directories creating sub-directories, 4-8 Index-2
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index listing with lsf , 4-8 mo ving and cop ying îles with mv and cp , 4-9 disc caddies, 6-19 disk driv e (CD R OM) installation, 6-18 {23 disk driv e (îexible) installation, 6-12 {17 disk driv e (hard) installation, 6-8 { 11 diskinfo , 6-11 , 6-14 , 6-21 disk storage, 1-7 DISPLAY en vironmen t v ariable, 4-24 displa ying windo ws remotely, 4-24 driv es installing, 6-8 {30 E echo , 4-4 editing a île information, 2-4 pro cedure, 4-14 editing functions, 4-14 ejecting a îexible disk, 6-17 en vironmen t v ariable DISPLA Y, 4-24 en vironmen t v ariables SHELL , 4-4 error messages b o ot, 7-2 errors b oo t problems, 7-10 LED indications, 7-5 etc/checklist , e diting, 6 -16 , 6-21 /etc/clusterconf , 7 -11 /etc/hosts , 4 -18 , 4-20 exit , 4-5 exit command, 3-10 exiting for an extended p e rio d, 3-10 exiting temp orarily ( command line), 3-10 F Fail-safe Session HP VUE, 7-8 îles cop ying b et w een directories, 4-9 core , 7-18 /etc/clusterconf , 7-12 mo ving b et w een d irectories, 4-9 prin ting, 4-12 remo ving with rm , 4-10 viewing con ten ts of, 4-12 îles and directories, 4-8 île system bac king up, 5-4 restoring, 5-10 system panic, 7-17 île system arc hiving, 5-2 îexible disk bac king up îles, 6-15 inserting, 6-17 moun ting, 6-16 remo ving, 6-17 retrieving îles, 6-15 testing installation, 6-14 îexible disk driv e, 6-12 {17 installing, 6-12 îopp y (îexible) disk driv e, 6-12 fsck , 7-15 ftp , 4-17 , 4-18 île manipulation, 4-20 G getty , 3 -11 H hard disk installing, 6-8 testing i nstallation, 6 -11 hard disk driv e conîguration, 6 -8 Index-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index hardw are failure at b o ot, 7-10 , 7-16 failure of p eripheral, 7-16 hardw are address, 7-11 $HOME/.rhosts ,4 - 2 0 HP-UX command line, 4 -2 {24 using, 4-2 {24 HP VUE activ ating, 3-12 ,3 - 1 3 c hec king error logs, 7-7 problems, 7-7 using, 3-12 I indicators, 7-4 information, înding, 2-2 {4 inserting a CD R OM, 6-19 , 6-22 inserting a îexible disk, 6-17 installation man uals, 2-2 installation man uals, 2-3 HP BASIC, 2-3 HP-UX, 2-3 installing CD R OM, 6-18 {23 DDS driv e, 6-24 {27 îexible disk driv e, 6-12 {17 hard disk driv e, 6-8 preparing for, 6-2 installing a îexible disk driv e, 6-12 in terfaces built in, 1-6 HP-HIL , 1-6 LAN, 1-6 RS-232, 1-6 ioscan , 6 -14 J jump er connections hard disk (factory), 6-8 K k ernel selection, 7-11 k eyb oard installation do cumen ts, 2-2 Key Shell, 4-3 , 4-6 Korn Shell, 4-3 , 4-5 L LAN problems with, 7-17 system panic, 7-17 LED indicators, 7-4 diagnostic, 7-5 logging in command line, 3-3 HP VUE, help, 3-14 problems, 7-8 when all else fails, 7-8 without windo ws, 7-8 logging out of a remote system, 4-23 log in on a remote system rlogin , 4-23 login shell, 4-5 lo oking at a île's con ten ts with more , 4-12 lp , 4-12 lsf , 4-8 M man , 4-7 manipulate îles remotely ftp , 4-20 man pages, 4-7 man uals for s p e ciîc languages, 2 -3 for s p e ciîc tasks, 2-2 ,2 - 3 sp eciîc tasks, 2-4 mkdir ,4 - 8 mkrs , 5-2 , 5-3 ,5 - 4 device îles, 5 -4 Index-4
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index errors, 5-4 monitor installation do cumen ts, 2-2 more , 4-12 mount , 6-16 , 6-17 , 6-21 , 6 -22 moun ting a CD R OM, 6-21 , 6 -22 moun ting a disk, 6-17 moun ting a îexible disk, 6-16 mouse installation do cumen ts, 2 -2 mv , 4-9 N net w ork installation do cumen ts, 2-2 In ternet Proto col, en tering, 2-4 op eration, 2-4 net w ork cop ying ftp , 4-18 net w ork IP n um b er do cumen ts for en tering, 2-3 net w ork problems, 7-20 new user accoun t, 3-5 NFS île system reco v ery using SAM, 5-7 No Windows VUE option, 3-11 O op erating systems, supp orted, 1-8 op erating tasks do cumen ts, 2-4 Options men u, 7-8 P panic message, 7-16 panic,system, 7-14 P ascal d o cumen ts, 2 -3 passwd command, 3 -7 passw ord selecting, 3 -7 p e ripherals disk driv e, 6-9 p orts A UI LAN, 1-6 HP P arallel, 1-6 IEEE, 1-6 LAN, 1-6 ThinLAN, 1-6 P osix Shell, 4-3 p o w ering d o wn, 3 -11 pre-installed systems, 3-2 preparing for installation, 6-2 prin ter installing using SAM, 6-3 testing installation, 6-5 troublesho oting, 6-6 prin ting a île lp , 4-12 problems b o oting from LAN, 7-11 can't înd k ernel, 7-12 net w ork, 7-20 prin ter, 6-6 secondary loader, 7-11 system b o ot, 7-10 , 7-17 with hardw are, 7-16 pro d uct description, 1-1 prompt, command line, 4-2 R rbootd daemon, 7-12 rcp , 4-17 , 4-20 , 4 -21 , 4 -22 reco v ery systems, 5-2 remotely c op ying a d irectory, 4-20 remotely c op ying a î le, 4-20 remo ving CD R OM, 6 -22 directory a nd con ten ts, 4 -11 îexible disk, 6-17 remo ving a î le with rm , 4 -10 restoring, 5-2 restoring île system, 5-10 {12 Index-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index restoring individual îles, 5-7 {9 restoring op erating system, 5-10 {12 restricted shells, 4-4 retrieving îles, 6-15 .rhosts , 4 -20 , 4-21 , 4 -23 rlogin , 4 -17 ,4 - 2 3 rm , 4-10 , 4-11 rm -rf , 4-11 running commands, 4-2 S SAM bac king up with, 5-2 , 5-4 new u ser accoun t, 3-5 SCSI bus address înding existing, 6-7 SCSI bus IDs determining activ e, 6-7 scsi device île, 6-8 secondary loader problems, 7-11 secondary loader program, 7-10 , 7-11 set_parms , 3-2 setting a passw ord, 3-7 SHELL en vironmen t v ariable, 4-4 shells, 4-3 c hanging y our shell, 4-5 default prompt, 4-4 do cumen ts for u sing, 2-4 features compared, 4-4 île names, 4-4 Shel ls: User's Guide , 4-7 starting a s ystem, 3-2 starting HP VUE, 3-12 system op erating t asks, 2 -4 system information , 3-2 system panic core dumps, 7-18 hardw are failure, 7-16 LAN, 7-17 reco v ering from, 7 -14 system reco v ery, 5-10 system securit y, 3-7 , 3-8 T telinit , 3-11 terms, deînitions, Glossary-1 {15 testing installation CD R OM, 6-21 testing installation (îexible disk), 6-14 testing installation (hard disk), 6-11 troublesho oting system panic, 7-14 {19 t yping commands, 4-2 U umount , 6-17 unmoun ting a CD R OM, 6-22 unmoun ting a disk, 6-17 un used SCSI bus address înding ,6 - 7 user accoun t, 3-5 user name, 4-5 using DDS driv e, 6-28 V vi , 4-14 {16 basic editing functions, 4-14 cursor mo v emen t, 4-15 do cumen ts, 4-16 quitting, 4-15 sa ving do cumen ts, 4-15 viewing a île information, 2-4 viewing a île w ith more , 4 -12 VUE ( HP VUE) activ ating, 3 -12 , 3 -13 W whoami ,4 - 2 Index-6
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index X xterm windo w, 3-12 X W indo w System activ ating, 3-12 information, 2-4 Index-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Notices Information in this do cumen t is sub ject to c hange without n otice. Hew lett-Packar d makes no warr anty of any kind ab out this manual, including, but not limite d to, t he implie d warr anties of mer chantability and îtness for a p articular purp ose. Hewlett-P ac k ard shall not b e liable for errors con tained herein or direct, indirect, sp ecial, inciden tal or consequen tial damages ab out the furnishing, p erformance, or use of this material. W arran t y. Please read the enclosed Hew l ett-Packar d S oftwar eP r o duct Lic ense A gr e ement and Limite d Warr anty b efore op erating this pro duct. Righ ts in the soft w are are oîered only on the condition that the customer accepts all terms and conditions of the License Agreemen t. Op er ating the pr o duct indic ates your ac c eptanc e of these terms and c onditions. If y ou do not agree to the License Agreemen t, y ou ma y return the un used pro duct for a full refund. A cop y of the sp eciîc w arran t y terms applicable to y our Hewlett-P ac k ard pro duct and replacemen t parts can b e obtained from y our lo cal Sales and Service Oîce. Cop yrigh t c î 1992 Hewlett-P ac k ard Compan y This do cumen t con tains information w hic hh a s be e n protected b yc o p yrigh t. All righ ts are reserv ed. Repro duction, adaptation, or translation without prior written p ermission i s p rohibited, except as allo w ed under t he cop yrigh tl a ws. Cop yrigh t c î A T&T, Inc. 1 980, 1984, 1986 Cop yrigh t c î The Regen ts of the Univ ersit y o f C alifornia 1979, 1980, 1983, 1985. This soft w are a nd do cumen tation is based in part on the F ourth Berk eley Soft w are Distribution u nder license from the Regen ts of the U niv ersit y of California.
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n R estricte d R ights L e gend Use, duplication or disclosure b y the United States Go v ernmen t is sub ject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) ( 1) (ii) o f the Righ ts in T ec hnical Data and Computer Soft w are clause at F ARs 52.227.7013. Hewlett-P ac k ard Compan y OSSD Learning Pro ducts 3404 East H armon y R oad F ort Collins, Colorado 80525
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Printing History New editions of this man ual incorp orate all material up dated since the previous edition. This man ual's prin ting date and part n um b er sho w its curren t edition. The prin ting date c hanges w hen an e w edition is prin ted. Minor c hanges ma y b e made at reprin t without c hanging the prin ting date. The man ual part n um b er c hanges when extensiv e tec hnical c hanges are i ncorp orated. Decem b er, 1992 Edition 2. This Edition includes material whic h app eared in the Mo del 382 and R/382 Owner's Guide (P/N A1473-90011) and the Mo del 382 Owner's Guide (P/N A1473-90014). New SAM, HP VUE, and device installation information h as b een added for HP-UX 9.0. Safety Symbols and Conv entions The follo wing con v en tions are used throughout this man ual: Note Notes con tain imp ortan t information set apart from the text. Caution Caution messages indicate pro cedures whic h, if not observ ed, could result in loss of data or damage to equipmen t. Do not pro ceed b ey ond a CA UTION message unless y ou fully understand and ha v e met the conditions stated therein. W arning W arning messages indicate procedures or practices which, if not observ ed, could result in personal injury . D o n ot proceed bey ond a W ARNING message unless y ou fully understand and ha v e met the c onditions stated therein. iv
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Regulatory Information F CC Statemen t (F or U.S.A. Only) The F ederal Comm unications Commission (in Subpart J of P art 15, Do c k et 20780) has sp eciîed that the follo wing notice b e b rough tt o the atten tion of the users o f this pro duct: This equipmen t g enerates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions man ual, ma y cause in terference to radio comm unications. It has b een tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuan t to Subpart J of P art 15 of F CC rules, whic h are designed to pro vide reasonable protection against suc hi n terference when op erated in a commercial en vironmen t. Op eration of this equipmen t in a r esiden tial area is lik ely to cause in terference in whic h case the user at his o wn exp ense will b e required to tak e whatev er measures ma y b e required to correct the in terference. T urv allisuusyh teen v eto (Finland Only) L aserturval lisuus Luok an 1 Laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP 9000 Mo del 382 tietok oneeseen v oidaan asen taa m uistilaitteeksi laitteensisî¿ ainen CD-R OM-levy asema, jok a on laserlaite. Tî¿ allî¿ oin m yî¿ os pî¿ aî¿ alaitteena toimiv a t ietok one k atsotaan laserlaitteeksi. Kyseinen CD-R OM-livy asema on kî¿ ayttî¿ ajî¿ an k annalta turv allinen luok an 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa kî¿ aytî¿ ossî¿ a levy aseman suo jak otelo estî¿ aî¿ a lasersî¿ ateen pî¿ aî¿ asyn laitteen ulk opuolelle. HP 9000 Mo del 382 tietok oneen o n t yyppih yvî¿ aksyn yt Suomessa laserturv allisuuden osalta T yî¿ osuo jeluhallitus, T yî¿ osuo jeluhallituksen h yvî¿ aksyn tî¿ an umero T SH 222/6019/90. Laitteiden turv allisuusluokk ao n mî¿ aî¿ aritett y v altioneuv oston pî¿ aî¿ atî¿ oksen N o: 472/1985 ja standardin SFS-IEC 825 m uk aisesti. Tiedot C D-R OM-levy asemassa kî¿ aytettî¿ avî¿ an laserdio din sî¿ ateily ominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 780 n m T eho 0,4 m W Luok an 1 laser v
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n V CCI Statement (Japan Only) vi
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Laser Safety Statement (For U.S.A. Only) (F or computers/con trollers with a CD R OM driv e installed.) The CD R OM driv ei s certiîed as a Class 1 laser pro duct under the U.S. Departmen t of Health and Human services (DHHS) Radiation P erformance Standard according to the R adiation Contr ol for H e alth and Safety A ct of 1968. This means that the device do es not pro duce hazardous laser radiation. Since laser ligh t emitted inside the device is completely conîned within protectiv e housings and external co v ers, the laser b eam cannot escap e from the mac hine during an y phase of user op eration. W arning Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures different from those specified in this manual ma y r esult in hazardous invisible laser radiation exposure. None of the mechanisms within the CD ROM driv e contain customer or field-replaceable parts. The CD ROM driv e becomes a Class 3B laser mechanism when disassembled. If the CD ROM driv e is disassembled, exposure to the invisible laser beam and hazardous invisible laser radiation could result in blindness. Do NOT disassemble the CD ROM driv e for any reason. vii
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Printing Conv entions This b o ok uses the follo wing t yp ographical con v en tions: If y ou see . . . It means . . . colored text User input. Activ ate the designated button, c ho ose the men u selection, or t yp e the text sho wn. F or example, more sample_file 4 Return 5 means y ou should t yp e the c haracters and press 4 Return 5 . computer text T ext displa y ed b y the c omputer system. F or example, login: indicates a login prompt displa y ed b y the system. italic text V ariable text supplied b y y ou. F or example, île n ame means that y ou t yp e a île name of y our c hoice. Italic text is also used for text emphasis and for do cumen t titles. 4 Key 5 T yp e the corresp onding k ey on the k eyb oard. F or example, 4 CTRL 5 - 4 D 5 means y ou hold do wn the 4 CTRL 5 k ey ,a n d press t he 4 D 5 k ey . N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N Displayed N N N N N NN NN NN N N Item Select an on-screen item or a corresp onding s oftk ey . F or example, N NN NN NN NN NN N N N Help viii
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Contents 1. Pro duct Description The HP 9000 Mo del 382 Con troller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 F eatures: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Built-In In terfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 In ternal Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Hardw are Arc hitecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Op erating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 2. Using Y our Man uals Ov erview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Finding Do cumen ts for Sp eciîc T asks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Hardw are I nstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Soft w are Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 System Op eration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 3. Starting Y our System Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Initially Conîguring Y our System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Using t he Command L ine to Log I n . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Setting U p a User Accoun t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Selecting a New P assw ord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Running the p asswd C ommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Exiting T emp orarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Exiting ( Logging O ut) for an Extended P erio d . . . . . . . 3-10 Exiting U sing the H P V UE F ron tP anel . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Contents-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Sh utting Do wn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Options for Y our Starting and W orking En vironmen t . . . . . 3-12 Activ ating the XW i n d o w S ystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Activ ating HP VUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Logging In and Using HP VUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Logging Out o f HP VUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 4. Using the Command Line Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 The Command L ine Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Running Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 W orking with Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Basics of Shells: Characteristics, Cho osing and U sing . . . . 4-3 Shell F eatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Determining Y our Login Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Using Key Shell: Visual Help for Korn Shell . . . . . . . . 4-6 Displa ying the HP-UX Man ual P ages from the Command Line 4-7 F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Using Files and Directories with Command Lines . . . . . . . 4-8 Creating Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Mo ving and Cop ying Files b et w een Directories . . . . . . . 4-9 Cop ying Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Remo ving Files and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Viewing and Prin ting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Prin ting a File with lp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Editing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Starting vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Selecting Editing F unctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 P ositioning the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Sa ving Y our W ork and Quitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 F or More Information on vi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Net w orking Ov erview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Cop ying Files Using ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Preparing t o Use ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 T ransferring F iles with ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Cop ying Files R emotely Using r cp . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Logging I n o n Another Computer Using rlogin . . . . . . . 4-23 Displa ying Remote Graphical P rograms L o c ally . . . . . . . 4-24 Contents-2
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 5. Bac king Up, Restoring, and Up dating Y our Soft w are Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Bac king Up Y our System and Soft w are . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Creating a Reco v ery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Bac king U p Y our File Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Restoring Individual Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Restoring Y our Op erating System Using the Reco v ery T ap e . . 5-10 F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 6. Conîguring HP-UX for Prin ters and Driv es Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Preparing f or Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Conîguring HP-UX for a Prin ter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 T esting the Prin ter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Finding the Status of Existing SCSI Bus Addresses . . . . . . 6-7 Conîguring for a Hard Disk Driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Soft w are Installation of the Hard Disk Driv e Upgrade . . . . 6-8 T esting Y our Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Conîguring for a Flexible D isk Driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 T esting Y our Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Arc hiving Files to a Flexible Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Retrieving Files from a Flexible Disk . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Moun ting a New Flexible Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Remo ving and Inserting a File-System Flexible Disk . . . . . 6-17 Conîguring for a CD R OM Driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Installing the CD R OM Driv e with SAM . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 T esting Y our I nstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Moun ting the New CD R OM Driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Remo ving and Inserting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Conîguring f or a DDS T ap e D riv e . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Conîguring t he Driv e o n HP-UX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 T esting Y our I nstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 DDS T ap e D riv e L ED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Maxim u m Usage of DDS C assettes . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 In Case o f D iîcult y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Contents-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7. Dealing with Problems Chapter Con ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 In terpreting Error Messages During Bo ot . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 In terpreting the LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Dealing with HP VUE Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Logging In With HP VUE When All Else F ails . . . . . . . 7-8 Re-Setting the VRX Sp ecial Device Files with mkno d . . . . . 7-9 Managing a Bo ot F ailure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Bo ot Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Reco v ering from a System P anic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Pro cedures for Reco v ering from a System P anic . . . . . . . 7-16 Dealing with Net w ork F ailures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 A. Conîguring the Bo ot R OM App endix C on ten ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Using the Bo ot R OM Conîguration Mo de . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Mo difying I/O Conîguration Information . . . . . . . . . A-4 Conîguring for Automatic Op erating System Selection . . . . A-6 F or More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 Glossary Index Contents-4
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 1 Product Description The HP 9000 Model 382 Controller The HP 9000 Mo del 382 con troller is ob ject co de compatible with most earlier Series 300 and Series 400 computers. Man y capabilities of p ersonal computers ha v e b een implemen ted. Key features include a lo w-cost 22 MIPS p erformance and a v ersatile I/O set including serial and parallel in terface p orts. Optional in ternal mass storage devices include hard and îexible disk driv es and CD R OMs. V GA-resolution (640 b y 480) graphics are used. Monitors are also supp orted with 1024 b y 768 medium-resolution and 1280 b y 1024 high-resolution color graphics. Graphics resolution is determined b y the system b oard t yp e and conîguration. Features: MC 68040 CPU op erating at 25 MHz. ECC (SIMM) RAM conîgurable from 8 MB to 32 MB. Three graphics resolution v ersions: 1024 b y 768 medium-resolution; for 16-in. color monitors. 1280 b y 1024 high-resolution; for 19-in. color monitors. 640 b y 480 V GA-resolution graphics with 14-in. color or gra yscale monitors. 25-pin RS-232 serial I/O p ort (expandable to 3 p orts). One 25-pin HP P arallel p o rt. One H P-IB p ort. SCSI p o rt (optional). HP-HIL p o rt for H P-UX k eyb oards and other H P-HIL devices. DIO-I and DIO-I I i n terface s lot d irect c onnect expanders (optional in terface bo xes f or connecting additional c ards). DIO-I Accessory Card slot Product D escription 1-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Ethernet IEEE 802.3 LAN, in ternal jump er selectable for A UI LAN or ThinLAN (optional). The Mo del 382 accommo dates up to t w om a s s storage driv es. These include: One of the follo wing: 3.5-in îexible disk driv e. CD R OM disk driv e. The additional driv e can be selected from the f ollo wing: 52 Mb yte hard disk driv e (not supp orted on HP-UX). 210 Mb yte hard disk driv e. 420 Mb yte hard disk driv e. (The Mo del 382 will also accommo d ate hard disk driv es in b oth p ositions.) A t ypical system w ould also include the follo wing: Pro duct Description Con troller (computer) The system unit con taining a h ard disk driv e with pre-loaded op erating system, one accessory card slot, and optionally a îexible disk or CD R OM driv e. Keyb oard Connects to the con troller via the HP HIL connector and used for input to the system. Mouse Connects to the k eyb oard and used to mo v e the displa y cursor. Monitor Connects to the con troller system and displa ys resp onses on its screen. Bus expander (optional) Stac ks on top of the con troller and a ccepts additional a ccessory cards. (See Figure 1-3 ). Op erating systems: HP-UX, factory i nstalled, or installed f rom C D R OM or tap e. HP RMB/WS O S HP RMB/UX OS P ascal W orkstation 1-2 Product D escription
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Memory User-installable RAM b oards pro vide user RAM in incremen ts of 4, 8, and 16 Mb yte b lo c ks. They ha v e an Error Chec king and Correcting (ECC) abilit y . Standard RAM is 4 MB, expandable to 32 MB. RAM b oards are used in pairs. There are four so c k ets on the system b oard for t w o-b oard pairs. RAM Upgrades are a v ailable as follo ws: HP A2210A; t w o 2 Mb yte RAM b oards that add a 4-Mb yte blo c k of memory . HP A2201A; t w o4 Mb yte RAM b oards that add an 8-Mb yte blo c k of memory . HP A2202A; t w o 8M b yte RAM b oards that add a 16-Mb yte blo c k of memory . Graphics One of three system b oards is used in the Mo del 382 con troller. Eac h has diîeren t graphics circuitry . T able 1-1 lists the system b oards and their graphics features for supp orted external monitors. T able 1-1. Model 382 Controller Graphics Features System Board Resolution Refresh Rate Displa y RAM Memory Planes Supp orted Monitor Medium- Resolution 1024 b y 768 75 Hz 6 Mbits 8 HP A1497A/B Color High- Resolution 1280 b y 1024 72 Hz 16 Mbits 8 HP A1097A/B Color V GA 640 b y 480 60 Hz 4M b i t s 8 HP D1182 Color Eac h s ystem b oard has its o wn graphics R OM and sp eciîc g raphics c rystals to enable the diîeren t r efresh rates a nd color. Both color a nd gra yscale graphics, a s w ell as video, a re a v ailable a t t he 15-pin rear p anel video c onnector. Product D escription 1-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Figure 1-1. Model 382 Controller Front P anel Built-In Interfaces All the built-in in terfaces for the Mo del 382 ha v e their connectors on the rear panel as sho wn in Figure 1-2 . The illustration sho ws the optional external SCSI and LAN connectors. The status indicator LEDs are also visible through the rear panel. Figure 1-2. Model 3 82 Controller Rear P anel 1-4 Product D escription
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 The Mo del 382 can b e used with one or t w o optional expanders whic h serv e to increase the input/output capacit y of the con troller. Figure 1-3 sho ws ho wt w o expanders w ould ît on to it. Figure 1-3. Model 3 82 with T w o Expanders Product D escription 1-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Interface Descriptions The SCSI in terface uses a high-densit y , shielded external connector for use with external mass storage devices. In ternally , a ribb on cable connects t o optional mass storage devices. The RS-232 serial in terface is expandable from one p ort to three p orts. The graphics circuit pro vides video for monitors. A 25-pin HP P arallel p ort is pro vided for use with devices using the Cen tronics TM in terface proto cols. Some conîguration parameters are a v ailable under b o ot R OM con trol in Conîguration Mo de for in ternal in terfaces. The HP-HIL connector (rear panel) accepts a v ariet y of HP-HIL input devices. HP 46021B In tegrated T erminal F ormat (ITF) Keyb oard. Other HP-HIL devices ma y also b e connected to the k eyb oard or HP-HIL connector. An optional IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Lo cal Area Net w ork (LAN) is a v ailable to t w o p orts: ThinLAN uses the BNC connector. An in ternal attac hmen t unit i n terface is used. A UI LAN u ses the 15-pin connector. An external attac hmen t unit in terface is required for use on the net w ork. Either p ort is activ ated b y the system b oard LAN jump er p osition. Some LAN in terface v alues can b e conîgured b y k eyb oard e n try u nder Bo ot R OM con trol in Conîguration Mo de. As with other Series 300 computers and con trollers, audio tone output is pro vided, as w ell as an in ternal sp eak er. 1-6 Product D escription
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Internal Mass Storage Devices The Mo del 382 ma y use u p to t w o in ternal mass storage devices connected to the i n ternal SCSI in terface. It is a v ailable in diskless as w ell as disk ed conîgurations. Disk ed conîgurations for HP-UX ha v e their hard disk driv e ba y îtted with either a 210 or 420 Mb yte preformatted hard disk driv e. As an option, the HP-UX op erating system ma y b e preloaded. A second disk driv e ba y can ha v e one of sev eral optional mass storage devices installed. F actory-installed and customer-installable mass storage devices include: HP A2258A 210 Mb yte H ard Disk Driv e. HP A2259A 420 Mb yte Hard Disk Driv e. HP A2252A 3.5-in. Flexible Disk Driv e, whic h can b e moun ted on HP-UX, used with SoftPC TM , or used for île exc hange. HP A2253A CD R OM Disk Driv e, whic h pro vides access to sev eral data sets and m ulti-media applications, as w ell as to most HP soft w are. Hardw are Architecture Most of the functionalit y for the Mo del 3 82 is con tained on one system b oard. All in terface con trollers, CPU circuits, memory con troller and graphics/video circuits are on the system b oard. Either t w o or four RAM b oards plug in to so c k ets on the system b oard. Eac h mass storage device has its con troller circuits on a PC b oard that is part of the device. Separate assem blies include the optional LAN b oard, and the fan and p o w er supply assem blies. Product D escription 1-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 1 Operating Systems HP-UX 9.0 is supp orted o n the M o del 382. It is pre-installed on disk ed HP-UX systems and includes HP VUE 3.0, whic h can b e activ ated after original b o ot. Users can start using the w orkstation immediately after hardw are installation. T able 1-2 lists the features and languages for the op erating system. T able 1-2. HP-UX Operating System and Languages for the Model 382 Op erating system: HP-UX 8.0 or later. HP-UX complies with X Op en, and POSIX sp eciîcations. Languages: ANSI/C, C , P ascal, HP-UX F OR TRAN/9000. User in terface: X Windo w System 11R5 (OSF/Motif 1.2), HP VUE 3.0, HP SharedX. Net w ork F eatures: IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Lo cal Area Net w ork: S.25. SNA. RJE. TCP-IP . HP Diskless. 1-8 Product D escription
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 2 2 Using Y our Manuals Ov erview This Owner's Guide co v ers the information y ou will need for getting started with using HP-UX on y our Mo del 382 con troller. The topics include logging in and using y our île system, editing îles, installing upgrade devices, and bac king up y our system and îles. In addition, Chapter 7 co v ers troublesho oting, if y ou should need it. Chapter Contents In this c hapter y ou will înd references to man uals for additional tasks related to installing, conîguring, and op erating the HP 9000 Mo del 382 and its asso ciated devices. F or troublesho oting information, please see Chapter 7. If y ou need help with system hardw are installation, see the Instal lation Guide for this system. If y ou do not ha v e a p re-installed (Instan t Ignition) system on y our disk and y ou need installation information, see Instal ling HP-UX 9.0 . If y ou ha v e installed y our system and w an t to get on with using it, skip to the second section o f Chapter 3 , \Using the Command Line to Log In" i n Chapter 3 . Using Y our M anuals 2-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 2 Finding Documents for Specific T asks This section describ es where to înd the information y ou ma y need to install and start using y our w orkstation. Hardw are Installation Installation of this Equipmen t Source Man ual Mo del 382, Keyb oard, Mouse, and Monitor. The Instal lation Guide for this system. LAN Upgrade. The HP A2255A LAN Interfac e Up gr ade Instal lation Guide Additional external p eripherals. The Instal lation Guide for the device and Instal ling Peripher als . DIO-I and DIO-I I Cards. ( Note that the DIO-II c ar d r e quir es an exp ander. ) The Instal lation Guide for the card and Instal ling Peripher als . CD R OM, H ard Disk, Flexible Disk driv es Chapter 6, in this man ual and the Instal lation Guide for the individual device. Net w ork connections. The Instal lation Guide for this system. 2-2 Using Y our Manuals
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 2 Softw are Installation Installation T ask Source Man ual Installing HP-UX. Instal ling a nd Up dating HP-UX 9.0 . Installing HP BASIC/UX. Instal ling and Maintaining HP BASIC/UX 6.2 . Installing HP BASIC/WS. Instal ling and Maintaining HP BASIC/WS 6.2 . Conîguring the Bo ot R OM. App endix A in this man ual and the Har dwar e Conîgur ation Guide for this system. Conîguring the LAN in terface. The Har dwar e Conîgur ation Guide for this system, the HP 9000 Series 300, 400 and 800 Computers Networking Overview ,a n d Instal l ing and A dministr ating LAN . En tering the system name and net w ork address. Chapter 3 and Chapter 7 in this man ual and the Instal lation Guide for this system. Creating new user accoun ts. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Setting or c hanging passw ords. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Setting p ermissions. Using HP-UX . Setting sw ap space. System A dministr ation T asks . Installing and using HP VUE. HP VUE User's Guide . Conîguring X Windo w s. Using the X Window System . Using Y our M anuals 2-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 2 System Operation Op eration Source Man ual Logging in and out of HP-UX. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Logging in and running BASIC/UX. Using HP BASIC/UX 6.2 . Logging in and running P ascal. Pasc al 3.2 User's Guide . Starting and running the X Windo w System. Using the X Window System . Sh utting do wn y our system. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Setting or c hanging passw ords. Chapter 3 in this man ual. Setting p ermissions. Using HP-UX . En tering commands in HP VUE. HP VUE User's Guide . En tering commands at a shell prompt (command line en try). Chapter 4 in this man ual, or Using HP-UX . Using the directory/île system in HP VUE. HP VUE User's Guide . Using the directory/île system with HP-UX commands. Chapter 4 in this man ual, or Using HP-UX . Using a shell. Chapter 4 in this man ual, Using HP-UX , or Shel ls: User's G uide . Viewing aî l e in HP VUE. HP VUE User's Guide . Viewing a île using HP-UX commands. Chapter 4 in this man ual. Editing a île. Chapter 4 in this man ual, Using HP-UX , or The Ultimate Guide to the vi and ex T ext Editors . Using basic net w ork services. Chapter 4 in this man ual, Using HP-UX , or Using Network Servic es . System bac kup/restoration. Chapter 5 in this man ual. System securit y . HP-UX System Se curity or Using HP-UX . Solving Problems F or tr oublesho oting c ommon p r oblems, se e C hapter 7 o r S olving HP-UX Pr oblems . 2-4 Using Y our Manuals
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 3 Starting Y our System Chapter Contents Initially Conîguring Y our System. Using the Command Line to Log In. Setting Up a User Accoun t. Selecting a New P assw ord. Logging Out. Sh utting Do wn. Options for Y our Starting and W orking En vironmen t. Starting Y our S ystem 3-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Initially Configuring Y our System If you have alr e ady lo ade d your HP-UX system and you have the \ login: " pr ompt on your scr e en, go on to the next p age. If y our system has HP-UX preloaded on its disk (this is indicated b y a lab el o v er the po w er switc h on y our con troller), HP-UX will automatically load itself when y ou îrst turn the p o w er on. During this pro cess, y ou will be ask ed for sev eral pieces of information needed to conîgure y our s ystem appropriately: The time zone where y our con troller is lo cated. The System name (host name) for y our w orkstation: an y alphan umeric, single-w ord name with eigh t or few er c haracters. The net w ork address n um b er, a lso called a n IP n um b er, for y our w orkstation. This consists of four address îelds separated b y p erio ds: for example, 255.32.3.10 . Y ou ma y need to consult with y our system administrator for this information. After y ou ha v e assem bled the hardw are for y our system, then ha v e the ab o v e information ready b efore y ou turn on the p o w er to y our con troller for the îrst time: 1. T urn o n the p o w er for y our con troller and displa y . 2. En ter the information when y our s ystem displa y requests it. If y ou do not ha v e the name, net w ork i.d., and time zone information when y ou are prompted for it, y ou can use the default v alues no w and e n ter t his information a t another time. Y ou w ould en ter the information later b y t yping: /etc/set_parms systemname The displa y will then prompt y ou for a n y information whic h is missing or whic hy ou ma y n eed t o r e-en ter. T o review the steps of the b o o t pro cess in detail, see the Instal lation Guide for this pro duct. 3-2 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Using the Command Line to Log In T o log in the first time: 1. T yp e root at the \ login: " prompt. 2. Press 4 Return 5 . Since y ou ha v en't y et set a passw ord, y ou will get a a system prompt ( # for root ), and y ou can b egin using the system. T o protect y our data, do the follo wing as so on as p ossible: a. Set up a passw ord for root . See the section \Selecting a P assw ord," later in this c hapter. b. Set up a \user" accoun t. A user accoun t pro vides the login en vironmen t for doing o rdinary tasks with y our system, while protecting y ou from acciden tally c hanging or erasing critical op erating system îles. See \Setting Up a User Accoun t", later in this c hapter to set up a user accoun t. c. Set up a passw ord for y our user accoun t. Note If y ou ha v e additional (non-ro ot) in ternal disk devices for y our île systems, or if y ou ha v e a DDS-F ormat (D A T) driv e, y ou will need to b e sure they are conîgured o n HP-UX b efore y ou can access them. If y ou ha v e a factory-installed ro ot disk with Instan t I gnition (pre-installed HP-UX), t he device îles for an y other included devices will already b ei n /dev . Y ou will need to conîgure sw ap or île systems for additional hard disk driv es, according to y our needs, and then moun t them. Use the SAM (System Administration Manager) to do this, b y follo wing the pro cedure in \Conîguring for aH a r d Disk Driv e" in Chapter 6. Or see the Instal l ation G uide for y our device(s) for t he details of the SAM p ro cedures. Starting Y our S ystem 3-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 After y ou log in the îrst time as root , the default lo cal login script prompts y ou to en ter y our terminal t yp e as follo ws. Y ou can r esp ond b y pressing y or n 4 Return 5 . Is your console one of the following: a 2392A, 2393A, 2397A, or 700/92? [y/n]: If y ou resp ond n (or 4 Return 5 ), y ou will see a ro w of n um b ers whic h asks y ou to determine the width (in columns) of y our screen. Resp ond b y en tering the largest n um b er y ou can see on the righ t (\128" is t ypical). If y ou are using a V GA displa y , en ter the largest n um b er y ou can see on the righ t of the îrst l ine . Similarly , y ou will see a displa y of n um b ered ro ws. Y ou will b e ask ed to determine the ro w with the largest n um b er, in the upp e r left. Resp ond b y en tering the largest n um b er y ou see (\49" is t ypical). The system resp onds with a n um be r (suc h as \300h") whic h indicates the TERM setting for this session. T o Log In Later a s User Y ou will use the pro cedure in the next section to set up a user accoun t. Then, when y ou log in as user name ,y our system displa ys the follo wing during login: TERM = ( hp) Pressing 4 Return 5 sets the TERM en vironmen t v ariable to \ hp ", the d efault v alue. Generally , this is all y ou will need to do, since \ hp " deînes appropriate format v alues for Hewlett-P ac k ard t erminals. 3-4 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Setting Up a User Account Y our can use SAM (System Administration Manager), to add a new user accoun t. If y ou aren't already logged in as root , t yp e exit 4 Return 5 and log in as root . (Y ou will see the # shell prompt whenev er y ou are root ). T o start SAM: 1. As root , t yp e /usr/bin/sam 4 Return 5 . The SAM op ening men u w ill app e ar. T o run Sam on ac haracter t erminal (without a mouse), use the 4 8 5 and 4 9 5 k eys to mo v e the selection highligh t up and do wn the men us (\select"), and press 4 Return 5 to \c ho ose" a highligh ted selection. Use function k eys to activ ate c hoices in the (top) men u bar, to get help or for other functions. Use 4 T ab 5 to activ ate other men u areas. When t yping, use the 4 6 5 and 4 7 5 k eys, 4 Backspace 5 , and 4 Delete cha r 5 for correcting mistak es. 2. A t the op ening men u, c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N Users and Groups-> b y highligh ting it, follo w ed b y pressing 4 Return 5 or selecting N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Open . 3. A t the next screen, c ho ose N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N Users . After a pause, y ou will see a screen displa ying a list of logins and real names. 4. Select N N N N N N N N N NN Add from the N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N Actions men u on the men u bar. On a c haracter terminal, use the N N N NN NN N f4 function k ey to activ ate the men u bar selections, and use the arro w k eys to mo v e to the one y ou w an t. Y ou will see a form N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Add a U ser Account . Starting Y our S ystem 3-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 5. Fill in y our l ogin name, c hoice of start-up program and en vironmen t, if diîeren t from the defaults giv en. Supply the optional information as needed. Note On this form y ou can select the X Windo w System as y our login default en vironmen t, if y ou so desire. 6. Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK (clic k on it, or press 4 Return 5 with N N N N N N N N OK illuminated) when y ou are înished. 7. Y ou will b e ask ed to select a passw ord. (See \Selecting a New P assw ord" for passw ord requiremen ts. If y ou wish, y ou can select a temp orary passw ord and reset i t later). T yp e the passw ord and press 4 Return 5 . R e-en ter the passw ord, as requested. The re-en tered passw ord m ust matc h the î rst. 8. Activ ate N N N NN NN N OK 9. When the \T ask Completed" m essage app ears, activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . 10. In the N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Users and Groups screen, select N N N N N N NN NN N N N N Exit from the N N N N N N NN NN N N N N List men u (or double-clic k on the N N NN N - in the upp er-left corner), if y ou are using a mouse. 11. Cho ose the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N Exit SAM function k ey . 12. T yp e exit at the # prompt to log out of root . 3-6 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Selecting a New P assw ord After y ou ha v e set up a user accoun t and passw ord, y ou ma y w an tt o c hange passw ords at a later time for securit y reasons. Cho ose y our new passw ord according to these rules: The p assw ord m ust c on tain b et w een six and eigh t c haracters. A t least t w o c haracters m ust b e letters (upp ercase or lo w ercase). A t least one c haracter m ust b e either of the follo wing: Numeric (the digits 0 through 9 ). Sp ecial (neither letters nor n umeric|for example, - , _ , or $ ). According to these rules, the follo wing are all v alid passw ords: foo-bar $money$ Number_9 @rophy Also, upp ercase and lo w ercase letters are diîeren t. Th us, these a re all diîeren t: foo-bar Foo-Bar FOO-BAR When y ou c ho ose a passw ord, y ou w an t to ensure that no one can guess what y ou c hose. If someone kno ws y our passw ord, that p erson ma y log in and access y our îles. Starting Y our S ystem 3-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Running the passwd Command When y ou'v e c hosen y our new passw ord, set it b y running passwd : $ passwd After y ou'v e en tered the passwd command, the program leads y ou through these steps: 1. If y ou don't ha v ea passw ord, skip this step. If y ou do ha v e a passw ord, passwd prompts y ou to en ter it. Changing password for leslie Y our username app e ars her e. Old password: invisible old p asswor d Enter your curr ent p asswor d. 2. When y ou see the follo wing p rompt, en ter y our new passw ord. (The screen will not ec ho what y ou t yp e.) New password: invisible p asswor d 3. Next, y ou need to re-en ter the new passw ord to v erify i t: Re-enter your new password: invisible p asswor d No w, when y ou log in again, use y our n ew passw ord. 3-8 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Logging Out Caution If y our system h as its o wn disk and y ou are logged in on y our lo cal op erating system, do not turn oî p o w er to y our system without îrst sh utting do wn its soft w are according t o the pro cedure in this c hapter, \ Sh utting Do wn". T urning oî the p o w er without îrst doing the sh utdo wn pro cedure ma y result in damage to data on y our disk. If y ou are running y our system as a no de in a cluster, and y ou ha v e a moun ted lo cal île system disk, y ou m ust also p erform the pro c edure in \Sh utting Do wn", o r ha v e y our system administrator do so. Using the command line (shell prompt), y ou can use either the lock command to secure y our screen for temp orarily lea ving y our w orkstation (and lea v e pro cesses running), or y ou can log out of y our curren t w ork session en tirely . The follo wing pro cedures explain lock and exit . Corresp onding actions can b e tak en on the HP VUE F ron t P anel. Starting Y our S ystem 3-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Exiting T emporarily If y ou w an t to lea v e y our w orkstation for a short time without logging out, en ter the follo wing: lock Y ou will b e ask ed to en ter a passw ord, whic h will not b ed i s p l a y ed: Key: invisible p asswor d Again: invisible p asswor d LOCKED No w the k eyb oard cannot be used un til y ou en ter the passw ord to unlo c k the system. Exiting (Logging Out) for an Extended P eriod The most common w a y to log out from the command line is b y using the exit command: $ exit Exiting Using the HP VUE Front P anel If y ou c ho ose to run HP VUE (see \Activ ating HP VUE"), y ou can lo c k y our screen temp orarily b y c lic king on the l o c k icon (an icon of a padlo c k) on the lo w er left. T o log out using HP VUE, y ou can clic ko n the \Exit" icon at the lo w er righ t. See HP VUE User's Guide for further information. 3-10 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Shutting Do wn Caution T urning oî the p o w er for y our con troller without îrst doing the sh utdo wn pro cedure ma y result in damage to data on y our disk. Alw a ys execute shutdown to completion îrst. T o sh ut do wn using the command line: 1. Log in as root Y ou can run shutdown without b eing root b y b eing listed in the île /etc/shutdown.allow . See System A dministr ation T asks for details. 2. En ter the follo wing: shutdown -h The -h option will cause the system to halt. Y ou or an y one net w ork ed to y our system will ha v e a grace p erio d of one min ute to stop pro cesses and sa v e w ork b efore the system halts. (Use shutdown -h 0 , if y ou w an t y our system to stop immediately). Y ou can then turn oî the p o w er when a message conîrms that it is safe to do so. Note En tering shutdown with no option will cause the system to halt after one min ute and reb o ot in single user state. It is not safe to your disk data to turn oî the p ower with the system running . If y our system runs a clustered net w ork, en tering shutdown -h also causes a message to be broadcast to net w ork ed users: SYSTEM BEING BROUGHT D OWN IN ONE MINUTE 3. Y ou will see a question: Do you want t o continue? (y/n) a. If y ou press n and 4 Return 5 ,y our w orkstation w ill not sh ut do wn. b. If y ou press y and 4 Return 5 ,t h e s h utdo wn pro cess starts. W ait for m essage: Halted, you may now cycle p ower. 4. Y ou can n o w safely turn oî the p o w er for y our con troller. Starting Y our System 3-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 Options for Y our Starting and W orking Environment Y our HP-UX con tains the îlesets to run either the X Windo w System or HP VUE (Visual User En vironmen t). T o run either the X Windo w System or HP VUE, y ou will need: More than 12 MB of memory in y our Mo del 382. A t least a 1024 b y 768 resolution monitor (color or gra yscale). Activ ating the X Windo w System If y ou wish to run just the X Windo w System, without using the HP VUE île managemen t features, y ou can select it as y our login default en vironmen t when y ou create y our new user accoun t. If y ou w an t to log in with the X Windo w System for the curren t session only , en ter the follo wing: x11start This will cause the X Windo w System to run, with system default settings, for the curren tl o g i n session. T o c hange y our startup en vironmen t to run the X Windo w System at eac h login, use SAM to mak e this c hange in y our user accoun t. See \Setting Up a User Accoun t", in this c hapter. F or information on using the X Windo w System, see Using X Windows . 3-12 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 d a c b Typical HP VUE W orkspace Activ ating HP VUE Before y ou activ ate HP VUE, îrst c hec k that y our system fulîlls the follo wing conditions in addition to those already giv en: The s ystem hostname is listed in /etc/hosts . It has a console-based graphics displa y (at least 1024 b y 768 resolution). It is able to run the X W indo w system. If y our I GNITION îleset is installed, y ou m ust run a s cript t o c omplete the conîguration o f t he Instan t I gnition t o ols. The s cript will edit /etc/inittab (if i t h as not b een extensiv ely customized) and /etc/newconfig/inittab to launc h H P V UE. I t a lso registers the IGNITION to ols s o t hat t hey are recognized b yH P VUE. Starting Y our System 3-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 On a diskless cluster, this script m ust b e run on eac h cno de that will run HP VUE and the Instan t Ignition to ols. 1. Log in as root . 2. T o run the script, t yp e : /etc/newconfig/Ignition/configure.sh The script will prin t out a success or failure message. If the script is successful, go on with the next section. If a failure o ccurs, see the section \Dealing with HP VUE Problems" in Chapter 7. V erifying Proper Operation Once the installation of the IGNITION îleset has b een completed and the configure.sh script has b een run, y ou can start HP VUE b y using t he follo wing metho d: Reb o ot y our system T yp e telinit 4; exit The HP VUE login screen should app ear; if it do es not, see Chapter 7. Logging In and Using HP VUE T o login: 1. Use the HP VUE login screen to log in as root . 2. During the l ogin pro cess, if y ou need help logging in, clic k on the login screen N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Help button. 3. Y our screen after login w ill h a v e a sligh tly d iîeren t a pp earance the î rst time y ou log in. Y ou will see a NNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Welcome windo w d ispla y ed along w ith t he HP VUE F ron tP anel, t he îrst time y ou log i n. The information i n t he NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNN Welcome windo w w ill h elp y ou explore the c apabilities o f y our system and p e rform some basic tasks. 3-14 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 4. When y ou log in to HP VUE for subsequen t sessions, y ou will see the F ron t P anel and the File Manager windo w for y our home directory . Y ou can still clic k on the N NN NN ? on the F ron t P anel to get help information or the N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Welcome windo w information. 5. T o get a terminal windo w with a shell prompt, clic k on the T erminal con trol button (a picture of a monitor and k eyb oard) on the F ron t P anel. The HP VUE T erminal Button 6. T o temp orarily lo c k y our screen, clic k on the Lo c k icon (a picture of a padlo c k) on the F ron t P anel. Figure 3-1. The Lock Button Logging Out of HP VUE T o log out of a session, close y our c urren tî l e s and clic k on the logout con trol on the F ron t P anel. The L ogout C ontrol 1 î Starting Y our System 3-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 3 For More Information T o înd out more ab out conîguring and using HP VUE and the X Windo w System, see the HP VUE User's Guide and Using the X Window System 3-16 Starting Y our System
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 4 Using the Command Line Chapter Contents The Command Line Prompt. W orking with Shells. Using Files and Directories with Command Lines. Viewing and Prin ting Files. Editing Files. Net w orking Ov erview. Using t he Command Line 4-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 The Command Line Prompt Whenev er y ou see the command line prompt, y ou can b egin t yping commands. If y ou are logged in as user , the command line prompt is either $ or % , dep ending on y our shell. H P-UX displa ys the prompt ev ery time y ou press 4 Return 5 . Running Commands T o run a command, t yp e the command's name after the prompt and press 4 Return 5 . The command then will b egin running. When the command înishes, the prompt reapp ears. F or example, run the follo wing whoami command no w: $ whoami 4 Return 5 leslie Y our user name app e ars her e. $ Then the c ommand line pr ompt r e app e ars. If y ou mak e a mistak e when t yping a command, use the 4 Back space 5 k ey to bac k up and correct it. (T o mak e e xamples as clear as p ossible, this man ual will not sho w the 4 Return 5 k ey at the end of eac h command line.) 4-2 Using the C ommand L ine
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 W orking with Shells Whenev er y ou en ter a command y ou are making use of a command in terpreter whic h in terprets that command for HP-UX. The command in terpreter is called a shell . When y ou log in, y ou are said to b e \in" a shell . HP-UX supp orts sev eral diîeren t shells whic h b eha v e in sligh tly diîeren t w a ys and giv e y ou v arying amoun ts of in teractiv e supp ort at y our displa y . These are called the Bourne, Korn, P osix, Key , and C Shells. The en vironmen t y ou select when y ou set up y our user accoun t determines whic h shell y ou get when y ou îrst log in, and y ou ha v e the option of c hanging shells later. Basics of Shells: Characteristics, Choosing and Using HP-UX giv es y ou y our c hoice of sev eral diîeren t shell-t yp es whic h y ou can run: the Bourne, Korn, P osix, Key , and C Shells. Eac h of these shells has diîeren t c haracteristics, and y ou can increase the sp eed and eîciency with whic h y ou in teract with HP-UX inside windo ws if y ou learn to use s ome of the built-in features of the shell of y our c hoice. F or details on shell features and b eha vior, p lease see the Using HP-UX and the Shel ls: User's Guide . Using t he Command Line 4-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Shell Features Belo w are listed some of the features whic h ma y help y ou mak e a decision on whic h s hell w ould b e b est for the kind of w ork y ou are doing: T able 4-1. Comparison of Shell Features F eatures Description Bourne P osix Korn Key C Command history A feature allo wing commands to b e stored in a buîer, then mo diîed and reused. No Y es Y es Line editing The abilit y to mo dify the curren to r previous command lines with a text editor. No Y es No File name completion The abilit y to automatically înish t yping î le names in command lines. No Y es Y es alias command A feature allo wing users to rename commands, automatically include command options, or abbreviate long command lines. No Y es Y es Restricted shells A securit y feature pro viding a con trolled en vironmen t with limited capabilities. Y es Y es (Not Posix Shel l) No Job con trol T o ols for t rac king and accessing p ro cesses that run i n the b ac kground. See Shel ls: User's Guide No Y es Y es 4-4 Using the C ommand L ine
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Determining Y our Login Shell The command echo $SHELL displa ys the î le name o f the s hell y ou en tered when y ou logged in. $e c h o $SHELL /bin/sh $ T emporarily Changing Y our Shell Unless y ou are in a restricted shell, y ou can temp orarily c hange y our shell b y using this command: shel l name where shel l name is the name of the shell (for example, sh , ksh , or keysh ). T emp orarily c hanging y our shell lets y ou exp erimen t in other shells. By t yping the name of the shell y ou w an t to run, y ou invoke (en ter) that shell, and the correct prompt is displa y ed. After exp erimen ting in the new shell, return to y our original shell b y t yping either exit or 4 CTRL 5 - 4 D 5 . P ermanently Changing Y our Shell T op ermanen tly c hange y our lo gin shel l (the default shell y ou get when y ou log in), use the chsh ch ange sh ell) command: chsh username shel l p ath name where username is y our u ser name and shel l p ath name is the full path name (e.g., /bin/ksh ) of the shell y ou w an t as y our d efault. After y ou use the chsh command, y ou m ust log out and log in again for the c hange to tak e eîect. F or example, if terry c hanges the default login shell to the Korn Shell, the command r eads: $ c hsh terry /bin/ksh $ Using t he Command Line 4-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Using Key Shell: Visual Help for Korn Shell Key Shell giv es y ou help on most HP-UX commands i n Korn Shell b y displa ying s oftk ey command-names and options in sequence. Y ou can select from these and let Key Shell build y our command lines \in E nglish" b efore y ou ha v e m astered the commands and command syn tax of HP-UX. Key Shell giv es y ou softk ey displa ys at the b ottom of y our screen whic h pro vide a \men u" of basic Korn Shell commands, along with their options in sequence. Y ou will îrst see a status l ine lik e the follo wing Figure 4-1. Key Shell Softk ey Displa y Y ou can en ter commands from the Key Shell softk ey men u or y ou can en ter standard HP-UX commands as usual. If y ou en ter standard HP-UX commands, Key Shell will often displa y an appropriate left-to-righ t set of men u options in the softk ey lab el area at the b ottom of y our screen. Eac h lab el corresp onds to a softk ey , N N N N N N N N f1 through N N N N N N N N f8 . The N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N hpterm at the cen ter separates the softk eys in to groups of four. Y ou ma y select an y or none of the options successiv ely b y pressing the corresp onding softk ey . When y ou w an t to see more commands, or more options to go with a command y ou'v e already c hosen, press the NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N --More-- softk ey , NN NN N N N N f8 . This will cause the Key Shell to displa y the next \bank" of softk eys in sequence, ev en tually cycling bac k to the îrst, if y ou press NN NN NN NN f8 rep eatedly . After y ou mak e a selection b y pressing a softk ey ,y our c hoice w ill app ear o n t he command l ine i n \ English," just as it app eared in the s oftk ey displa y , with t he correct order a nd spacing. 4-6 Using the C ommand L ine
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Displa ying the HP-UX Manual P ages from the Command Line T yp e man c ommand name at the command prompt. F or example, to learn more ab out the cp command t yp e: $m a n cp After a few seconds, an information displa y app ears. The message - More -(11%) means y ou'v e view ed 11% of the île, and 8 9% remains. (Some systems will just displa y - More - ). A t this p oin t, y ou can do an y of the follo wing: Step through the île a page at a time b y pressing the space bar. Scroll through the île a line a t a time b y pressing 4 Return 5 . Quit viewing the reference page b y pressing 4 q 5 . T o prin t a man page for a command named c ommand , en ter the follo wing: man c ommand | col -b |l p Y ou can use the man command to get a complete listing of HP-UX man uals b y en tering: man manuals For More Information Y our shell has man y pro ductivit y-enhancing capabilities y ou ma y înd useful. T o learn ab out shells in detail, also refer to Using HP-UX and to Shel ls: User's Guide . Using t he Command Line 4-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Using Files and Directories with Command Lines The follo wing giv es y ou some basic information on using the HP-UX directory system. If y ou need more information on using îles, directories, and command lines, see Using HP-UX . Creating Directories The mkdir (mak e directory) command creates a new directory . After y ou create a directory , y ou can mo v e îles in to it, and y ou can ev en create more directories underneath it. F or example, to create a sub-directory in y our curren t w orking directory n amed projects , t yp e: $ mkdir projects T o v erify that it w ork ed, y ou can use either the ls or lsf command. Both commands displa y the new directory , but lsf app ends a slash ( / ) to the end of directory names to diîeren tiate them from île names. F or example: $ ls List îles, dir e ctories in your curr ent working dir e ctory. myfile projects It worke d! $ lsf myfile projects/ The lsf c ommand app ends a slash to dir e ctory names. Figure 4-2 sho ws the resulting directory structure. Figure 4-2. Creating t he \projects" Directory The general form o f the mkdir command is as follo w s: mkdir new dir p ath where new d ir p ath is the p ath name of the d irectory y ou w an t t o c reate. 4-8 Using the C ommand L ine
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Mo ving and Cop ying Files b etw een D irectories The mv command can be used to mo v e î les from one îlename to another or from one d irectory to another. F or example, to mo v e myfile in to the projects directory , t yp e: $ cd Move to your home dir e ctory îrst. $ mv myfile projects The general form of the mv command is as follo ws: mv fr om p ath to p ath where fr om p ath is the île n ame or path name of the île y ou w an t to mo v e, and to p ath is the name of the path where y ou are m o ving the île. Cop ying Files T o cop y a île in to a diîeren t directory , use the cp command. F or example, to mak e a cop y of myfile named myfile2 in the projects directory , t yp e: $ cp myfile projects/myfile2 T o mak e a new v ersion of myfile2 named myfile3 in y our curren t directory , t yp e: $ cp projects/myfile2 myfile3 The general form of the cp command is as follo ws: cp fr om p ath to p ath where fr om p ath is the île name or path name of the île y ou w an tt o cop y , and to p ath is the path name of the directory or île to whic h y ou are cop ying. Caution If y ou cop y a île t o a directory ,e v en if the directory h as the same name as the î le, t he directory will not b e d estro y ed. B ut a île of the s ame n ame in that directory w ould b e . As a g eneral rule, b efore u sing mv or cp ,u s e ls or lsf to ensure that the target île n ame to whic hy ou w an tt o m o v eo r cop y d o e sn't already exist. Using the C ommand Line 4-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Remo ving Files and Directories If y ou ha v e îles that are n o longer needed, y ou should remo v e (delete) them. Deleting unnecessary îles lea v es more ro om on y our system. F or example, supp ose y ou'v e înished using myfile2 , and it is no longer n eeded. T o remo v e myfile2 , t yp e: $ rm myfile2 T o remo v ea n empty directory , t yp e the follo wing: rmdir dirname If there are an y visible or in visible (\dot") îles still in the directory , this command will not b e e xecuted, and y ou will get a message that the directory is not empt y . Also, if there are a n ys u b directories in the directory , y ou will get a message. In either case y ou can do the follo wing: cd dirname rm * ll -a A ny invisible \dot" îlenames r emaining wil l b e displaye d. rm .îlenames Y ou may have to r ep e at this c ommand for al ld o t îles. rmdir * This r emoves any empty sub dir e ctories. cd .. T o get to the p ar ent d ir e ctory again. rm dirname 4-10 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 T o a v oid this pro cess and remo v e a directory and al l its îles and dir e ctories in one action, t yp e the follo wing: rm -rf dirname Caution Use rm -rf with great caution, since it do es remo v e a directory and a ll its c on ten ts, irretriev ably , in one action. Using the C ommand Line 4-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Viewing and Printing Files The more command displa ys a text île's con ten ts on the screen. F or example, the follo wing line displa ys the con ten ts of myfile : $ more myfile This is the text of "myfile", which I had previously entered. $ If the île con tains more lines than are on y our screen, more pauses when the screen is full. With a longer île, y ou can press 4 space 5 to con tin ue lo oking at additional screens, and press 4 q 5 when y ou are înished. Then more returns y ou to the system prompt. F or using the vi text editor, see \Editing Files", in this c hapter. Printing a File with lp If y our system is appropriately conîgured, y ou can prin t a t ext île using the lp ( l ine p rin ter) command. Before using the lp command y ou ma y need to înd out whether y our system is set up so that y ou can use the lp command. If it is not, basic installation information is in Chapter 6, in this man ual. Y ou can înd detailed information on installing and conîguring prin ters in System A dministr ation T asks . If lp do es w ork on y our system, y ou ma y also n eed to înd out the lo cation of the prin ter, on an extensiv e system. When y ou ha v e this information, prin t myfile b y running t he lp command: $ lp myfile 4-12 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 If the lp command is w orking prop erly , it should displa y a message indicating that it sen t y our île to the prin ter. F or example: request id is lp- numb er (1 file) The numb er is an i.d. n um be r assigned to the prin t job b y the lp command. If y ou don't see this message, or if y ou get an error message, consult y our system administrator. If lp w orks successfully , y ou should g et a p rin tout with y our username displa y ed on the îrst page. The time required for a prin tout dep ends on the n um b er of tasks b eing run b y the system a nd the s p eed o f the prin ter. T o displa y a rep ort on the prin ter status, including the order of y our prin t job in the p rin ter q ueue, t yp e: $ lpstat -t T o c ancel a prin t job, en ter the cancel command, with the i.d. n um b er for y our job: $ cancel r e quest id Using the C ommand Line 4-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Editing Files Y ou can use the in teractiv e text editor vi to enable y ou to view and alter text îles, as w ell as to create new ones. This section in tro d uces the b asics of using vi .F or detailed information, s ee The U ltimate Guide to the vi and ex T ext Editors . Starting vi Start vi b y en tering the command vi îlename at the prompt. If a île called îlename exists, y ou will see the îrst screen of that île. If the île do es not exist, it is created, a nd y ou will see a blank screen. Selecting Editing Functions The vi editor has sev eral functional mo des. When y ou en ter vi y ou are in command mo de and it is in this mo de that y ou select all editing functions. Y our selection determines what y ou can do to the text. Press 4 ESC 5 to ensure that vi is in command mo de. Then y ou can execute an y of the follo wing commands (among others): i (the insert command) Places y our île in text mo de and en ters whatev er y ou t yp e preceding the cursor. Ev erything after the cursor will b e mo v ed to the r igh t. a (the app end command) Places y our île in text mo de and en ters whatev er y ou t yp e after the cursor. The cursor mo v es to the righ t, and then text is inserted as with i . x (the delete command) Deletes the c haracter t hat is highligh ted b y the cursor. This command do es not put y our d o cumen t in text mo de. Eac h command in command m o d e a llo w s y ou to p erform only that function. F or example, if y ou place y our île in text mo de b yt yping r (\replace a single c haracter" command), t hen y ou ma y o nly r eplace o ne c haracter. Y ou are then placed in command mo de, a nd y ou can return to text mo de b yt yping i or a b efore inserting t ext. 4-14 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 P ositioning the Cursor The most commonly-used metho dt o mo v et h e cursor i s to use the h , j , k , and l k eys. Y ou can also use the arro w k eys. These k eys mo v e the cursor as follo ws (press 4 ESC 5 îrst for command mo de): T able 4-2. T o Do This . . . T yp e This Command . . . Mo v e the c ursor righ t. l or 4 7 5 Mo v e the cursor left. h or 4 6 5 Mo v e the cursor up. k or 4 8 5 Mo v e the cursor do wn. j or 4 9 5 Sa ving Y our W ork and Quitting Y ou can sa v e y our w ork with or without quitting vi . Y our do cumen t m ust b e in command mo de for y ou to b e able to use the follo wing commands to sa v e y our w ork. Press 4 ESC 5 to ensure that y our do cumen t is in command mo de: T able 4-3. T o Do This . . . T yp e This Command . . . Sa v e w ithout quitting vi :w Sa v e and quit vi :wq Quit vi without sa ving c hanges :q! Sa v e u nder another île n ame :w îlename Sa v e i n a n e xisting île and o v erwrite t hat î le :w! îlename Using the C ommand Line 4-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 For More Information on vi The vi text editor comprises man ym o r e functions than are d escrib ed in this brief in tro duction. Refer to Using HP-UX or The Ultimate Guide to the vi and ex T ext Editors for more complete information ab out vi . 4-16 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Netw orking Ov erview Y our HP-UX system can use a v ariet y of net w orking services to enable y ou to transfer copies of îles to or from other computer systems. These s ervices can also enable y ou to log o n to remote mac hines on the net w ork and run commands and pro cesses remotely . This section giv es y ou basic pro cedures for using the follo wing net w orking functions: Cop ying îles to and from a remote computer: ftp . Cop ying îles remotely: rcp . Logging on to another c omputer on the net w ork: rlogin . Displa ying remote graphics programs lo cally . F or information on using HP-VUE on remote systems, NFS-moun ting remote île systems, and exp orting île systems to remote systems, see Using HP-UX , HP VUE User's Guide , or Using Network Servic es . Using the C ommand Line 4-17
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Cop ying Files Using ftp The ftp île transfer program allo ws y ou to cop y îles b et w een y our lo cal system and r emote systems and among remote HP-UX, UNIX, and non-UNIX net w ork hosts that supp ort ARP A services. The ftp program not o nly allo ws y ou to p erform remote île cop ying , but also facilitates île managemen t op erations suc h as c hanging, listing, creating, and deleting directories on a remote system for whic h y ou ha v ea v alid login or accoun t. Using ftp y ou can cop ya lo cal île to a remote île or vice v ersa. Y ou can also app end a lo cal île to the end of a remote île. The île to whic h y ou are cop ying can ha v e either the same or a diîeren t directory path and/or name as the one o n the originating system. Preparing to Use ftp Mak e sure that y our /etc/hosts île c on tains en tries for the remote hosts with whic h y ou will comm unicate. Ha v e the system administrators for the remote hosts arrange to giv e y ou a passw ord and an accoun t, or a login guest accoun t, so that y ou can log in on the remote hosts. 4-18 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Transferring Files with ftp 1. T o in v ok e ftp and connect to a remote host in one step, t yp e the follo wing: ftp r emote hostname This connects y ou to the remote host. ftp then conîrms the connection and prompts y ou for a remote login name: Name ( r emote hostname ): If y ou in tend to log in with the same remote login name as y our lo cal login name, just press 4 Return 5 . 2. En ter the p assw ord a sso ciated with y our remote login name and ftp will conîrm this action with a message and a conîrmation that y ou are l ogged in: Password ( r emote hostname ): invisible p asswor d Password required for r emote lo gin name User r emote lo gin name logged in. 3. If y ou are going to transfer binary (as opp osed to \readable" text) îles, t yp e bin at the prompt, b efore p ro ceeding. Use get to transfer îles from a r emote host to y our lo c al dir e ctory . A t the ftp> prompt, t yp e: get r emote îlename The r emote îlename is the name of a île in the remote w orking directory . In that case, ftp copies the île to the lo cal w orking directory and giv es it the s ame île name as the r emote name . If the île is in another directory on the remote host, r emote îlename is the absolute or relativ e p ath for that île. The ftp program copies t he île t o a île n ame with the same path o n y our l o cal system. (F or example, get /user/doc/ îlename ). If there i s n o m atc hing path, ftp giv es y ou a message, \ No such file or directory ". If the d estination île a lready exists, ftp o v erwrites its con ten ts with the con ten ts of the remote île. When c op ying successfully , ftp giv es y ou messages conîrming the c op y and the length o f time i t r equired. Using the C ommand Line 4-19
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Use put to transfer îles from y our lo c al dir e ctory to a r emote host . A t the ftp> prompt, t yp e: put lo c al îlename r emote îlename In this case, lo c al îlename is copied to the remote île name in the sp eciîed remote directory . lo c al îlename can b et h e name of the lo cal île in y our curren t lo cal w orking directory . ftp will cop y the île in to a île of the same name in r emote île . r emote îlename can b e an absolute or relativ e path to a île name on the r emote host. I f not sp eciîed otherwise, it will b e in the curren t w orking directory on the remote host. General File-Manipulation Commands for ftp See Using HP-UX for information on ho w to use ftp île-manipulation commands, suc h as cd, mkdir, pwd , and rmdir , man y of whic h function in the same w a y as the corresp onding HP-UX commands. If y ou need information on an y of the ftp commands, just t yp e help (or ? ) at the ftp prompt. Exiting ftp T o close the connection with the remote host and exit ftp , t yp e: bye Cop ying Files Remotely Using rcp Y ou can cop y îles b e t w een H P-UX o r other UNIX hosts on the n et w ork using rcp . Also, using appropriate options, y ou can c op y d irectories b et w een systems using rcp , i f the conîguration îles that the service u ses a re set up prop erly . Preparing to Use rcp T ou s e rcp ,y ou'll need the follo wing prerequisites: An accoun t (login) o n the remote host. 4-20 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 A .rhosts île in the remote host home directory con taining the names of y our lo cal host system and y our lo cal login name. A .rhosts île o n y our lo cal system, as w ell. This con tains the names of all the systems y ou will cop y from. It will ensure that y ou will b ea b l e to use rcp when y ou use rlogin on the remote system. Note A $HOME/.rhosts île creates a signiîcan t securit y r isk. T o prev en t unauthorized users form gaining remsh access to y our remote accoun t and host, only you should b e able to create and write to a .rhosts île in y our remote home directory . P ermissions need to b e set accordingly . A /etc/host île on y our lo cal system whic h lists hosts with whic h y ou can comm unicate using ARP A/Berk eley Services. F or eac h host, the île has a line con taining information ab out t he remote host in the follo wing form: internet a ddr ess oîcial name alias Y ou will înd t hat the /etc/hosts île is useful for lo oking up names and addresses on the net w ork. T o facilitate suc ha lo okup, use the grep to ol describ ed in gr ep (1) and in Using HP-UX . Cop ying a Local File to a R emote Host T o cop y from y our system to a remote system, use the follo wing syn tax: rcp lo c al îlename r emote hostname : r emote îlename Note that, if lo c al île is not in y our curren t directory , y ou will need to supply the relativ e path (to get f rom y our curren t directory) or the absolute path (from / ), in addition to the l o cal î le name. Y ou will need to sp ecify the complete (absolute) path for the r emote îlename on r emote hostname only if y ou w an ti t t o g o i n to a d irectory other t han the r emote h ome d irectory . F or example, t o c op y myfile from y our c urren t directory to a r emote s ystem called xyz : rcp myfile xyz:/users/leslie/otherdir Using the C ommand Line 4-21
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 In this case, myfile will b e copied as myfile in to the remote sub directory , otherdir . If y ou had only supplied the remote host name, rcp w ould ha v e copied myfile in to the remote home directory , also a s myfile . Y ou can also include a îlename in the destination. F or example, to cop y to a system named xyz : rcp myfile xyz:/users/leslie/otherfile In this case, y ou ha v e copied myfile as otherfile , in the remote directory leslie . Cop ying a File on a Remote Host to Y our Local Directory No w, to rev erse the pro cess, here is ho w y ou w ould cop y a île fr om a remote host in to y our lo cal directory . Use the follo wing syn tax: rcp r emote hostname : r emote îlename lo c al îlename F or example, to cop y myfile from y our accoun t in a remote system xyz in to y our curren t directory: rcp xyz:/users/leslie/myfile . The dot ( . ) is shorthand for \curren t directory". In this case, myfile will b e copied as myfile from the remote directory in to y our curren t directory . Y ou do not ha v e to supply the destination îlename if y ou don't w an t to cop y it to a new name. If y ou w an t to cop y myfile in to another directory in y our home system, use a path name, absolute or relativ e, as sho wn: rcp xyz:/users/leslie/myfile otherdir/ Or, if y ou w an t to cop y the île t o another î le name in another directory: rcp xyz:/users/leslie/myfile otherdir/otherfile Run the ls command t o c onîrm what y ou ha v e d one. 4-22 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 Logging In on Another Computer Using rlogin If y ou ha v e an accoun to n a remote host , then y ou can use rlogin to log in on a remote host b y supplying y our remote login name and passw ord. Y ou can then w ork on that system just as y ou w ould on y our home system. If the remote host is conîgured to allo wi t , y ou can also log in on a remote host automatically , without ha ving to supply y our login name and passw ord. Logging In on a Remote Host A t the shell prompt, u se the form: rlogin r emote hostname The r emote hostname is the name of an appropriately conîgured remote system. As b efore, this system is named in y our /etc/hosts île and in y our .rhosts île. The remote host prompts y ou for y our remote passw ord. En ter y our remote passw ord. The remote host logs y ou in with the login message and the remote host prompt. If for some reason y ou should mak e an error in en tering y our passw ord, the remote host will giv e y ou the error message, \ Login incorrect ", and will prompt y ou for y our login, and y our passw ord: Login incorrect login: Getting the Same W orking Environment on the Remote Host T o get the remote host en vironmen t to b eha v e in the same w a y as y our home en vironmen t, y ou can s et the .profile or .login v alues to b e the same b y cop ying y our lo cal .profile or .login îles to y our home directory on the remote system. A s with y our h ome s ystem, t he v alues i n y our .profile or .login will tak e p recedence o v er the v alues i n the remote system's /etc/profile or /etc/csh.login île. Logging O ut and E xiting the Remote Host Y ou can log out o f the remote h ost j ust a s y ou w ould from y our home system, b yt yping: Using the C ommand Line 4-23
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 exit T yping 4 CTRL 5 - 4 D 5 also logs y ou out o n most system. A t this p oin t y ou are logged out of the remote host, disconnected, and returned to HP-UX on y our lo cal system, whic h displa ys a message and y our lo cal prompt: Connection closed. $ Displa ying Remote Graphical Programs Locally If y ou are running HP VUE or the X Windo w System, y ou can run a program using windo ws on a remote mac hine and displa y the results lo cally . This is done b y setting the DISPLAY en vironmen t v ariable on the remote system. DISPLAY sets the host, displa y n um b er, and screen n um b er to whic h a system sends bitmapp ed output for clien ts. F or example, if the remote mac hine is called r emote , y our lo cal system is lo c al , and the remote program is called xwijit , en ter the follo wing on y our system: xhost r emote This enables your system to r e c o gnize the r emote h ost. rlogin r emote L o g in on a r emote machine on which you have an ac c ount. DISPLAY= lo c al :0.0 On the r emote machine, set the DISPLA Y variable to display on your lo c al system. export DISPLAY Exp ort the v ariable xwijit R un the pr o gr am 4-24 Using the Command Line
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 4 For More Information F or detailed information on running HP VUE in a net w ork ed en vironmen t, see the HP VUE User's Guide . Using the C ommand Line 4-25
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 5 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our Softw are Chapter Contents Bac king Up Y our System and Soft w are. Restoring Individual Files. Restoring Y our Op erating System Using the Reco v ery T ap e. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Backing Up Y our System and Softw are The most imp ortan t part of y our system is the data y ou ha v e accum ulated. It is also esp ecially imp ortan t to protect y our o p erating system from corruption if y our HP-UX has be e n supplied as a pre-installed \Instan t Ignition" disk. Y ou can protect y our data and op erating system from loss, using the general pro cedures giv en in this c hapter. F or detailed pro cedures, see Instal l ing and Up dating HP-UX 9.0 or System A dministr ation T asks . Mak e sure y ou create and main tain a bac kup HP-UX k ernel ( /SYSBCKUP ) on y our disk from whic h y ou can b oo t in an emergency . A /SYSBCKUP is automatically created b y SAM whenev er y ou reconîgure and reb o ot a new k ernel from y our system console. T o build y our bac kup system, y ou can use the follo wing devices: Cartridge tap e driv es DDS F ormat (\D A T") driv es Magneto-optical disk driv es Other hard disk driv es Bac k up y our île system regularly . If y ou receiv ed y our w orkstation with Instan t Ignition, it is imp ortan t to create y our îrst reco v ery tap ea n d to arc hiv e y our existing île system as so on as p ossible . Creating a Reco v ery System A \reco v ery system" is a sp ecial tap e con taining a subset of the HP-UX op erating s ystem and s ome restoration to ols. In the ev en t of an op erating system failure that prev en ts y ou from b o oting or logging in to HP-UX, y ou can bo ot from the reco v ery system tap e and use the t o ols on the tap et o repair the île system on y our disk. A reco v ery system is created b y using commands rather than b y using SAM. Y ou can also restore y our s ystem from a system C D R OM that y ou can purc hase from y our HP sales represen tativ e. Y ou should m ak e a system reco v ery tap e u sing mkrs at the follo wing times: Immediately after y ou set u p y our new w orkstation. 5-2 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Eac h time y ou up date y our op erating system or mak e a c hange in y our disk sw ap conîguration. T o do this, y ou will need a tap e driv e (cartridge or DDS-format) and one or more tap es. Using mkrs to Create a Reco v ery System: The mkrs command constructs a reco v ery system on a tap e or a formatted hard disk driv e. If y our system later b ecomes un b o otable due to a corrupt ro ot disk, then y ou can b o ot y our system from the reco v ery tap e or the alternate hard disk. Once b o oted on the reco v ery system, y ou can then use the to ols it pro vides to repair the corrupt ro ot disk. Some Options for mkrs If enough free disk space is a v ailable in /usr/tmp (t ypically 10-20Mb), the -q option can b e used to mak e mkrs create an image of the reco v ery system in this directory b efore it copies it to the reco v ery medium. This option generally sa v es a great deal of time due to reduced seeking on non-random-access reco v ery medium (cartridge or DDS tap e). F or DDS-format tap e reco v ery systems, the -q option is assumed. When creating a DDS-format reco v ery system for a small memory w orkstation (8Mb or less), the -s option should b e used to sp ecify that a smaller set of îles b e placed on the reco v ery system. See mkrs (1M) for more options with mkrs . Source Device Files By default, mkrs uses the follo wing source device îles: /dev/update.src /dev/rct/c0 /dev/rct If none of the a b o v e defaults exist on y our system, one of these devic e îles must b ec r e ate d or the -f option m ust b e u sed t o s p e cify the device île t o b e used. The reco v ery d evice î le can b e e ither blo c ko r c haracter. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Root Device Files mkrs ,b y default, uses the follo wing device îles for the ro ot device: /dev/dsk/0s0 /dev/root /dev/hd If none of the ab o v e defaults exist on the system, one of these device îles m ust b e created or the -r option m ust b e used to sp ecify the device île to b e used. The ro ot device île m ust b e ab l o c k device î le. If Y ou Ha v e a Problem An error message results if: None of the default device îles for the r eco v ery device exist and the -f option is not used to sp ecify a reco v ery device île. None of the default device îles for the ro ot device exist and the -r option is not used to sp ecify ar o ot device île. The mac hine t yp e cannot b e determined and the -m option is not used to sp ecify the mac hine t yp e. Backing Up Y our F ile Systems Preparation: The follo wing pro cedure sets up as c heduled b ac kup: 1. If y our system is more than six mon ths old, y ou ha v e n on-HP supp orted soft w are, or y ou ha v e nev er done a bac kup b efore, see System A dministr ation T asks or Instal ling and Up dating HP-UX 9.0 b efore p ro ceeding. Otherwise, SAM will pro vide in teractiv e g uidance. T o use SAM, do the follo wing: 2. Log i n a s root . 3. T yp e /usr/bin/sam . 4. Cho ose NNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNN Backup and Recovery from the o p e ning men u. 5. Cho ose NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNN Backup Devices (to determine what b ac kup devices are connected) or NNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Automated Backups . 5-4 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 a. If y ou op ened NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Backup Devices , and no devices are sho wn, mak e sure the device is connected and the tap e is inserted. Note If y ou ha v e to connect a device during this p ro cess, c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Refresh from the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Options men u. b. Cho ose the en try for the desired device. c. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N Add an Automated Backup from the N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N Actions men u. 1. If y ou go directly to N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Automated Backups , y ou can select y our lo cal or remote bac kup device from N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Actions ! N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Add an Automated Backup (Lo cal or Remote) ! N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Specify Backup Device . A f orm will displa ya n y existing bac kup devices. 2. Before initiating the bac kup, v erify that y our tap e is not write-protected b y c hec king that the write-protect device is in \writable" p osition. 3. Load at a p e in to the tap e driv e. Dep ending on what tap e driv e y ou are using, y ou ma y see activit y ligh ts îashing while the tap e is loading. Y ou can pro ceed when one ligh t remains on, indicating that the driv e is ready to accept d ata. 4. F rom the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N Add an Automated Backup screen, y ou can select the options whic h will bring up additional forms for sp ecifying the follo wing required items: a. N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Select Backup Device (if y ou ha v e not already sp eciîed it). b. N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N Select Backup Scope : what îlesets to include or exclude. The default is to bac kup the e n tire system. c. N NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Select Backup Time : time, da y , date. Y ou can also set whether y ou w an t a full or incremen tal bac kup, for eac h t ime sp eciîcation. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 5. NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N Additional Parameters (optional) allo ws y ou to sp ecify the follo wing: a. If y ou w an t y our bac kups to cross NFS moun t p oin ts. b. If y ou w an t the tap e (cartridge or auto c hanger) r ew ound. c. If y ou w an t an index log t o b e created for eac h bac kup. (Results can b e mailed t o a designated user). 6. After the minim um required forms are îlled out, SAM w ill then use y our tap e device to complete the bac kup according to y our sp eciîcations. 5-6 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Restoring Individual Files T o restore sp eciîed îles from a lo cal device using SAM, îrst y ou will need to ha v e the follo wing information and materials: A list of îles y ou need. The media on whic h the data resides. The lo cation on y our system to restore the îles (original lo cation or relativ e to some other lo cation). The device and device île for restoring the data. Note T o restore data to disks ph ysically connected to another system, en ter the NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N Remote Administration functional area of SAM. When restoring îles that are NFS moun ted to y our system, frecover can only restore those îles ha ving \other user" write p ermission. The frecover command normally op erates in user -mo de when crossing NFS moun t p oin ts; not root -mo de. T o ensure that frecover can restore the îles exp orted from the NFS serv er, login as root on the NFS île serv er and use the root= option to the /usr/etc/exportfs command to exp ort the correct p ermissions. Refer to exp ortfs (1M) in the HP-UX R efer enc e and the Instal ling and A dministering NFS Servic es man ual. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 T o Restore Individual Files: 1. Ensure that y ou ha v e root capabilities. 2. Run SAM b y t yping: /usr/bin/sam 3. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N Backup and Recovery 4. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Backup Devices . 5. Highligh tt h e device in the list from whic h the data is to b e restored. 6. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Recover Files or Directories from the N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N Actions men u and highligh t N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Select Recovery Scope . Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK or press 4 Return 5 . 7. Cho ose the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N Selected Files c hec kb o x (it should ha v e an asterisk (*) in it. Do either of the follo wing: Fill in the îlename con taining a list of îles to restore. The îlenames should b e full pathnames. This île is not a graph île. This île is used to create a graph île. Y ou can use the on-line index île created b y a previous bac kup, but it m ust b e edited to con taining only the full pathnames of the îles to b e r estored. Or en ter eac h île name in the \Included" and \Excluded" b o xes and c ho ose N N N N N NN NN N N Add . If y ou mak e a mistak e, highligh t the en try with the error and use N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N Modify or N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N Remove to correct the mistak e. Only the \Included" b o x is required, if y ou c ho ose this metho d. Y ou can use b oth the île and the included/excluded metho d sim ultaneously to sp ecify î les to b e r estored. When y ou ha v e completed determining the selected îles to b e reco v ered, activ ate N NNNNNNN OK . 5-8 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 8. T o do an y of the follo w ing during the restore pro cess, activ ate N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N Set Additional Parameters : Ov erwrite new îles. Main tain original o wnership. Reco v er îles using full path name, or Place îles in a non-ro ot directory . T urn on the appropriate c hec kb o x(es). T o restore îles relativ e to a particular directory , îll in the directory . Activ ate the N N N N N N N N OK con trol button to set the a dditional parameters. 9. Activ ate the N N N N N N N N OK con trol button to start the restore pro cess. If conîrmation messages app ear, read the message(s) and activ ate t he N N N N N N N N OK con trol button to pro ceed in eac h case. SAM displa ys a windo w con taining the output of the executed frecover command. Backing Up, Restoring, a nd Updating Y our Softw are 5-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 Restoring Y our Operating System Using the Reco v ery T ape If y our op erating system or the en tire ro ot disk b ecomes c orrupted and not usable, y ou can restore y our system using y our reco v ery system tap e and y our arc hiv e bac kup tap e(s). Also see App endix A for information on using the Bo ot R OM to înd and b oo t from a reco v ery tap e. If y our op erating system is still u sable but n ot functioning c orrectly , y ou can load the îleset TOOL from an up date tap e to obtain diagnostic utilities, Y ou can b oo t a memory-based v ersion of hp-ux (kno wn as a r e c overy system ) from the tap e cartridge or DDS-format reco v ery tap e whic h y ou ha v e made. F rom the reco v ery system, y ou can moun t and unmoun t île systems, run fsck to c hec k and repair île systems, cop y îles bac ko n to y our system disk, and v arious other tasks. Caution Do not run fsck on a île system that is moun ted and a ctiv e. This could in tro duce data corruption. Run fsck in single-user mo de when c hec king the ro ot île system. F or île systems other than the ro ot île system, unmoun t the île system, run fsck , and then remoun t the île system. If y our system disk (including /SYSBCKUP ) is un b o otable, do the follo wing: 1. Load the reco v ery t ap ei n y our tap e driv e and b e sure that the driv e is turned on. 2. W ait for the driv e to b ecome r eady (the \busy" ligh t remains o î ). 3. Reset y our computer b y turning it oî and then bac k on. B o ot the system and pause the b o ot pro cess b y pressing 4 ESC 5 after the computer p erforms its color self-test and prompts for b o ot selection. 5-10 Backing Up, Restoring, and Updating Y our S oftw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 4. A t the b oo t selection screen, select the op erating system that is on the tap e driv e as the one y ou w an t to b o ot from. F or example, for the t ap ed r i v e: ... 1R SYSRECOVERY ... En ter b and the devic e sp e ciîc ation , suc h as 1R : b devic e sp e ciîc ation 5. Y our reco v ery system should b egin loading from the tap e. Once y our reco v ery system is up and running y ou will ha v e a minim um set of commands to use, in order to help y ou repair and r estore y our primary (disk-based) op erating system. 6. F rom this p oin t, the sp eciîc things y ou need to do to reco v er y our primary system dep end on the nature of the b o ot problem. Some of the things that y ou migh t need to do are outlined in the follo wing list: Note If y our inabilit y to b o ot y our system is caused b y fault y hardw are, it will b e necessary to ha v e that hardw are repaired b efore y ou can pro ceed with the items in this list. a. Y ou migh t need to run the fsck program to repair y our ro ot île system. Do so in single-user mo de only . b. The /hp-ux k ernel île can b e restored, if it has b een corrupted or remo v ed, b y doing the follo wing: i. Moun ting y our system disk to an empt y directory (mak e one if necessary) in y our memory-based reco v ery system. ii. Using the cp command to cop y the /hp-ux île from y our memory-based system (it is a c op yo f y our r e al /hp-ux île) to the directory y ou used as a moun t p oin tf o r y our system disk. The destination île should b e called hp-ux . Backing Up, Restoring, and U pdating Y our Softw are 5-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 5 c. Y ou migh t need to restore imp ortan t system îles suc h as /etc/inittab , /etc/rc , etc. from y our memory-based system to y our system disk. The pro cedure for doing this is almost iden tical t o the pro cedure for restoring /hp-ux . Only the île names and directories will b e diîeren t. d. Y ou migh t also need to mo v e, remo v e, cop y , or searc h for other îles. Note that the memory-based system has limited capabilities. Y our primary ob jectiv e is to restore y our disk-based system to a b o otable condition and then reb o ot y our computer from y our system disk. F rom that p oin t, y ou can reco v er lost îles from bac kup tap e s, or whatev er else is necessary to restore y our system to its normal op erational condition. For More Information F or more information on bac kup and reco v ery , see Instal ling and Up dating HP-UX 9.0 , System A dministr ation T asks , and the references for mkrs (1m), cpio (1), and tcio (1) in the man pages or in HP VUE H elp. Also see Solving HP-UX Pr oblems . 5-12 Backing Up, Restoring, and U pdating Y our Softw are
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 6 Configuring HP-UX for Printers and Driv es Chapter Contents Preparing for Installation. Conîguring HP-UX for a Prin ter. Finding the Status of Existing SCSI Bus Addresses. Conîguring for a Hard Disk Driv e. Conîguring for a Flexible Disk Driv e. Conîguring for a CD R OM Driv e. Conîguring for aD D S T ap e Driv e. Configuring H P-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Preparing for Installation If y our system w as shipp ed with its in ternal mass storage devices factory-installed, y ou will not need to do further installation to enable the device to comm unicate w ith HP-UX. I f y ou ha v e purc hased a new (upgrade) device, y ou will ha v e to install it on HP-UX. Y ou ma y also ha v et o do some conîguration for appropriate data in terc hange with a new prin ter. This c hapter giv es y ou general guidance f or these tasks. F or p eripherals devices i n general: F or a list of device upgrades whic h are supp orted b y the Mo del 382 see \In ternal Mass Storage D evices" in Chapter 1. See the Instal lation Guide for the device y ou are i nstalling for information on hardw are installation. Y ou can also get installation information from Instal ling Peripher als . Ensure that eac h new device y ou install whic h comm unicates through the SCSI proto col has a unique bus addr ess . Y ou can use /etc/ioscan (see \Finding the Status of Existing SCSI Bus Addresses") to determine this, or y ou can use SAM (System Administration Manager). The factory-set SCSI addresses for the upgrade devices in this c hapter are a s follo ws: Hard Disk Driv e: 6 Flexible Disk Driv e: 0 CD R OM Driv e: 2 DDS Driv e: 3 This c hapter sho ws y ou ho w to use basic SAM (System A dministration Manager) pro cedures. SAM will determine the status of an y of y our connected devices and will p erform man y installation tasks for y ou. If y ou don't w an t t o use SAM, or it is not o n y our system, y ou can a lso HP-UX c ommands directly to accomplish the same tasks. F or information on using man ual system administration p ro cedures, see System A dministr ation T asks . 6-2 Configuring H P-UX for P rinters and Driv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring HP-UX for a Printer Y ou will need to supply certain items of information needed to iden tify the prin ter y ou are installing. It will help to ha v e this information a v ailable to refer to during t he soft w are i nstallation pro cess: Prin ter In terface: P arallel: Serial (RS232) P ort 1: Serial (RS232) P ort 2: Prin ter Name (a name the system uses to iden tify the prin ter. It can b e an y name.): Prin ter M o del Num b er (lo cated on a lab el on the bac k of the prin ter): Procedure: T o install y our prin ter: 1. Log in as root . Mak e sure y ou ha v e a prin ter connected. 2. Run SAM b y t yping the follo wing, and then pressing 4 Return 5 : /usr/bin/sam T o get help in SAM, pressing the 4 f1 5 k ey giv es y ou con text-sensitiv e information for the ob ject at the lo cation of the cursor. In case y ou are not using a mouse, arro w k eys and 4 T ab 5 also are used for mo ving the highligh t ed areas a round the screen. Activ ating b y pressing 4 Return 5 with N N N N N NN N OK illuminated i s e quiv alen t t o clic king the mouse on N N N N N NN N OK .S e e Using HP-UX for t he details o f k eyb oard equiv alen ts. 3. A t t he SAM o p ening screen, c ho ose ( highligh t and o p e n) NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Printers and Plotters . 4. Cho ose NNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Printers/Plotters from t he next screen. Configuring H P-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 If y our w orkstation do esn't ha v e an y prin ters connected, y ou will see a message. If y ou get this message, activ ate N N N N N NN N OK or press 4 Return 5 while N N N N N NN N OK is illuminated. 5. F rom the N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Actions men u (on the men u bar at the top of the Prin ter/Plotter Manager windo w), c ho ose NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN Add Local Printer/Plotter 6. Cho ose a n appropriate selection on the sub-men u giving options for P arallel, Serial, HP-IB, etc. 7. A windo w for the t yp e selected will giv e y ou information on a v ailable in terfaces. 8. If y ou c hose N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN Add Serial (RS-232) Printer/Plotter , more than one serial in terface could b e listed. The RS-232 in terfaces are listed in ascending order. The lo w est-n um b ered RS-232 in terface corresp onds to the lo w est-n um b ered RS-232 connector on y our system. Cho ose the one to whic h y ou ha v e connected y our prin ter. 9. Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . The windo w op ens for N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N Add Local Printer/Plotter . 10. Select the b o x lab eled N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Printer Name and en ter y our printername for the new prin ter (as en tered in this man ual earlier). 11. Cho ose NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Printer/Model Interface 12. Scroll do wn the next screen to înd the Mo del Name of y our prin ter. 13. Cho ose the Mo del Name. 14. Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . 15. In the N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N Add L ocal Printer/Plotter windo w w hic h r eapp ears, c ho ose t he bo x lab eled NNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNN Make this the system default printer (unless y ou w an t to add the device as an alternate prin ter). 16. Activ ate NNNNNNNN OK . 17. If y ou are running H P V UE, y ou will b e ask ed a question ab out a dding t he prin ter name to the VUE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN N Printers subpanel. 6-4 Configuring HP-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 18. If the prin ts p oo l e r w as not previously running, a windo w will app ear with the question: N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Do you want to start the print spooler now? . Select N N N N N N N N N N N Yes and press 4 Return 5 . 19. Y ou will see a conîrmation screen asking if y our prin ter is turned on, connected to y our system, and o nline. Chec k y our prin ter to ensure that it is ready , and press 4 Return 5 . 20. Y ou will see the message N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Task completed . Press 4 Return 5 . 21. Exit the task and c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N Exit SAM . 22. En ter exit to exit root and return to user status. Refer to System A dministr ation T asks , for additional SAM information. T esting the Printer Installation If y ou made y our prin ter the default system prin ter, en ter the follo wing commands to test it: cd lp .profile 4 Return 5 (If y our prin ter (called printername )i s n ' t the default system prin ter, en ter the follo wing command to test it:) lp -d printername .profile The île named .profile should prin t out on y our new prin ter. Configuring H P-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Dealing With Printer Problems If y ou exp erience problems in prin ting, ensure that the follo wing are correctly installed: The p o w er cord for the prin ter is plugged in. The prin ter is turned on. The prin ter selection switc hes are set for online. P ap er is loaded in to the prin ter (and it isn't jammed). The correct in terface has b een set up. The prin ter cable i s connected t o the c orrect in terface p ort on y our prin ter. The cable is connected to the correct p ort on y our system. 6-6 Configuring HP-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Finding the Status of Existing SCSI Bus Addresses Before y ou install a new SCSI driv e, to ensure that the SCSI bus address of y our device is curren tly un used, y ou can u se SAM, or y ou can use the ioscan to ol to help determine whic h devices are curren tly connected. T o determine the curren tly connected SCSI bus IDs, en ter the follo wing command line: /etc/ioscan -fb The result will b e a displa y of information, suc h as the follo wing: Class H/W Path Driver H/W Status S/W Status Description ========================================================= ================ ... disk 2.0.1.2.0 scsi ok(0x5800101) ok TOSHIBA CD-ROM tape_drive 2.0.1.3.0 scsitape ok(0x1800202) ok HP HP35450A disk 2.0.1.6.0 scsi ok(0x101) ok MICROP 1528 ... F or example, the SCSI bus address for the \MICR OP" disk device is in the fourth column of its hardw are address as \ 6 " ( 2.0.1. 6 .0 ). If y ou w ere installing another disk, for île s ystem use, it w ould b est b e accessed at the adjacen t SCSI bus address in the \scanning" order, \ 5 ". In an y ev en t, SAM will help y ou determine an a v ailable device île, corresp onding t o an y un used SCSI address setting, when y ou do the installation. Configuring H P-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring for a Hard Disk Driv e Hard disk driv e upgrades can b e installed to accommo date lo cal île systems and sw ap space on y our w orkstation. Softw are Installation of the Hard Disk Driv e Upgrade After hardw are installation has b een c ompleted (see the Instal lation Guide for this device), y ou'll need to ensure that y our op erating system is prepared to exc hange data with the device. This section pro vides instructions for conîguring HP-UX to comm unicate with a hard disk driv e upgrade. Note that y our HP disk is pre-formatted. Caution Although the device is w ell-protected from ph ysical sho c k when installed in the w orkstation, it is v ery easily damaged when separate. Av oid dropping or striking a d evice. The factory-set SCSI bus address for the disk driv e: F or an upgrade disk driv e: SCSI bus address: 6 This SCSI address assumes usage of the disk as root . Although the conîguration jump ers in the bac k of the driv e are factory-installed and should not require reconîguring, it is p ossible that the SCSI bus address jump ers for an upgrade ma y b e shipp ed with diîeren t settings. Therefore, please see the Instal lation Guide for the driv e for t he pro cedure for resetting jump ers, should it b e necessary . The follo wing list outlines the soft w are p ro cedures y ou'll înd in this section for installing the hard disk driv e as a île system disk: Use S AM to do the f ollo wing: Conîgure a n u n used device île w ith the select c o d e and bus address for y our d evice. Build a î le system on the d isk. Moun t the disk so that y ou can access it as a î le system. 6-8 Configuring HP-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Note SAM do es not supp ort the follo wing: Changing the hardw are address of a disk driv e con taining the ro ot île system. Changing the hardw are address of a disk arra y . Changing the hardw are address of a disk that is part of soft w are d isk striping. After hardw are installation has b een completed (see the Instal l ation Guide for this device), y ou'll need to ensure that y our op erating system is prepared to exc hange data with the device. This section pro vides i nstructions for doing this. 1. Run SAM b y t yping the follo wing: /usr/bin/sam Pressing the 4 f1 5 k ey giv es y ou con text-sensitiv e information for the ob ject at the lo cation of the cursor. 2. Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N Disks and File Systems . 3. Cho ose N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N CD-ROM, Floppy, and Hard Disks . 4. F rom the N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N Actions men u, select the item N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Add a Hard Disk Drive . 5. F rom the screen whic h app ears, select the step N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN Select a Disk to Add . 6. Y ou will see a list of un used driv es. Cho ose the d isk y ou w an t to add from this list. 7. If the device y ou ha v e just connected do esn't app ear, activ ate NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Device Missing , a nd y ou will b e giv en the f ollo wing options: Configuring HP-UX for Printers and Driv es 6-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 a. Ha v e SAM r escan the system for t he device. If y ou ha v e connected the device after starting SAM, y ou should a ctiv ate N N N N N N N N N NN Yes . Otherwise, activ ate N N N N N N N N No . b. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether the device is connected and p o w ered up. c. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether additional device driv ers are needed. (Unless the k ernel has, for some reason, had d riv ers remo v ed, the d riv ers needed for a hard disk should curren tly b e in the k ernel.) d. Y ou will b e giv en an information screen suggesting t hings to try if the device still cannot b e found. If this is the case, y ou will need to consult Instal ling Peripher als . 8. After y ou c ho ose the d evice, y ou will see a form giving three tasks: a. NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N Select a Disk to Add . (Y ou ha v e already done this). b. N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Set Disk Usage and Options . c. N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Modify Defaults... . (This task is optional). Cho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N Set Disk Usage and Options . 9. On the form whic h app ears, select ho w y ou w an t to use the disk (\File System", \Sw ap", or b oth). Activ ate N N N N N NN N OK when y ou ha v e înished this step. 10. If y ou w an t to mo dify the defaults, complete the i nformation screen for this step. Then activ ate N N N N N N NN OK . 11. Y ou will b e returned to the NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N Add a Hard Disk Drive form. Activ ate NN NN NN NN OK to exit this form. 12. A \ Messages" B o xa p p ears, r ep orting the p rogress of the t ask. When the task is înished, a ctiv ate NNNNNNNN OK . 13. Exit SAM. (SAM copies y our o riginal /etc/checklist to /etc/checklist.old ). 6-10 Configuring HP-UX for Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 T esting Y our Installation A simple test to mak e certain that the d riv e has b een installed correctly (whether it is moun ted or not) is to execute the command diskinfo (using the appropriate c haracter device île name as the argumen t). F or example, en ter the f ollo wing at the shell prompt: diskinfo /dev/rdsk/6s0 If the disk is installed correctly , diskinfo will displa y a listing of information ab out it, suc h as the follo wing: SCSI describe of /dev/rdsk/6s0 vendor: Quantum product id: PD210S type: direct access size: 200000 Kbytes bytes per sector: 512 After moun ting a new disk on a directory , en ter ll at the shell prompt to get a directory listing. This should giv e y ou at least one île or directory e n try . F or example: total 1024 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 8192 Aug 31 15:24 lost found Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring for a Flexible Disk Driv e Caution Although the device is w ell-protected from ph ysical sho c k when installed in the w orkstation, it is v ery easily damaged when separate. Av oid dropping or striking a device. Note the îexible disk driv e jump ers are pre-conîgured correctly at the factory . It should not b e necessary to c hange jump er settings. The factory-set SCSI bus address for the driv e: SCSI bus address: 0 Note On this device, an installed address jump er is a logical 0 , con trary to the practice with most other SCSI devices,. Th us, al l thr e e addr ess j ump ers ar e normal ly instal le d . As it is p ossible that the SCSI bus setting for an upgrade ma yb e shipp ed diîeren tly , please c hec k the jump ers b efore installation. See the Instal lation Guide for the device for the pro cedure for resetting the device, should it b e necessary . After h ardw are installation has b een completed, y ou'll need to ensure that y our op erating system is prepared to exc hange d ata with the device. This section pro vides instructions for doing this. 1. If y ou wish to initialize a new disk, mak e sure y ou ha v e the disk loaded in the driv e. 2. Run SAM b y t yping the follo wing: /usr/bin/sam T o g et help i n S AM, p ressing the 4 f1 5 k ey giv es y ou con text-sensitiv e information for the o b j ect a t the lo cation o f the cursor. 3. Cho o se NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Disks and F ile Systems . 4. Cho o se NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NN CD-ROM, Floppy, a nd Hard D isks . 6-12 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 5. F rom the NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN Actions men u, select NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N Add a Floppy Disk Drive... . Y ou will see a list of un used disks, including the new one y ou ha v e connected. 6. Cho ose the line iden tifying the m o del o f the n ew disk. If the device y ou ha v e connected do es not app ear on the list: a. Chec k y our hardw are connections, and mak e sure that the device is turned on . b. Activ ate the button N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N Device Missing ,a n d y ou will b e giv en the follo wing options: i. Ha v e SAM rescan the system for the device. If y ou ha v e connected the device after starting SAM, y ou should activ ate N N N N N N N N N N N Yes . Otherwise, activ ate N N N N N N N N No . ii. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether the device is connected and po w ered up. iii. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether additional device driv ers are needed. iv. Y ou will b e giv en an information screen suggesting things to try if the device still cannot b e found. 7. After y ou highligh t the device, note that the N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Initialize disk button is toggled on (the default). Activ ate this button to turn it oî if y ou do not wish to initialize a disk (or if the disk is preformatted). 8. Activ ate NN N N N N N N OK when y ou ha v e înished w ith this form. 9. A \Messages" Bo xa p p ears, rep orting the progress of the task. When the task is înished, activ ate N NN N N N N N OK . 10. Exit SAM. (SAM copies y our o riginal /etc/checklist to /etc/checklist.old ). Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 T esting Y our Installation A simple test to mak e certain that ev erything has b een installed correctly is to execute the command diskinfo . 1. Mak e sure a îexible disk is inserted in the driv e (otherwise, a core dump ma y result). 2. T yp e the follo wing, using the appropriate device île name as the argumen t. F or example: diskinfo /dev/rfloppy/0s0 If the disk is installed correctly , diskinfo will displa y a listing of information ab out it, suc h as the follo wing: /dev/rfloppy/0s0 SCSI describe of 0.rdsk: vendor: TEAC product id: XXXXXXX type: direct access size: 1400000 bytes bytes per sector: NNN If y ou wish to test the installation of y our îexible disk driv e without a disk installed, use the ioscan command. 6-14 Configuring HP-UX for Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Archiving Files to a Flexible Disk Data can b e stored on îexible disk media i n av ariet y of formats. The capacit y of these d evices is generally to o small to hold useful HP-UX île systems. Instead, DOS or LIF île systems are commonly used. Data can also b e stored in an arc hiv e-utilit y format. F or example, tar and cpio are commonly used to share data with other HP-UX systems. See the man pages or HP-UX R efer enc e references dosif (4) and lif (4) f or detailed descriptions of the île systems. F or information o n tar and cpio , see tar (1) and cpio . T o sa v e îles arc hiv ally to a î exible disk using tar , use a formatted disk and en ter the follo wing command line, where p athname is the directory where the îles reside: tar -cvf /dev/rfloppy/0s0 p athname Retrieving Files from a Flexible Disk T o list îles stored in a tar arc hiv e on a îexible disk, without transferring them to y our hard disk, use the follo wing command line: tar -tvf /dev/rfloppy/0s0 This lists all the îles on the îexible disk. T o transfer or restore îles from a îexible disk to y our hard disk driv e, do the follo wing: 1. Load the source disk in to the îexible d isk driv e. 2. Using cd , mak e sure y ou are in in directory y ou w an tt h e îles to reside in. 3. En ter t he follo wing command line to restore p athname on the disk to y our curren t directory: tar - xvf / dev/rfloppy/0s0 p athname Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Mounting a New Flexible Disk If y ou w an t HP-UX t o be able to address a newly-inserted îexible disk as a small île s ystem, y ou will need to moun t it. Execute the follo wing to moun t the new disk. F or example, using \ /flex " as the m oun t d irectory: mount /dev/floppy/0s0 /flex See the next section for information on moun ting and u nmoun ting a disk used as a île system. 6-16 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Remo ving and Inserting a File-System F lexible Disk Caution If y ou wish to use t he disk as am o u n ted île system, y ou m ust moun t it ev ery time y ou insert it in to the driv e, and y ou m ust unmoun t the disk b efore y ou eject it from the driv e. Y ou will need to do the follo wing: Before y ou remo v e a d isk: 1. T emp orarily unmoun t the île system for the disk b y executing the follo wing. F or example, if the disk is designated b yt h e blo c k d evice île /dev/floppy/0s0 : umount /dev/floppy/0s0 2. Remo v e the disk. After y ou insert a disk: 1. Moun t the disk île system so that HP-UX will recognize it. If, for example, y ou are moun ting the disk in a driv e designated b yt h e device île /dev/floppy/0s0 under a pre-existing directory /flex , execute the follo wing: mount /dev/floppy/0s0 /flex (Note that the directory /flex , in the example, m ust be giv en an absolute path name). In this example, the mount command announces to the system that a remo v able île system is to b e attac hed at the directory /flex . 2. No w y ou can access the î exible disk as y ou w ould an y other disk. Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-17
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring for a CD ROM Driv e Y ou can u se aC D R OM (\Compact Disc Read-Only Memory") driv e to accommo date read-only use of a wide v ariet y of soft w are, including HP-UX system up dates. After hardw are installation for a driv e has b een completed (see the Instal lation Guide for this device), y ou'll n eed to ensure that y our op erating system is prepared to exc hange data with the device. This section pro vides instructions for conîguring HP-UX to comm unicate with the CD R OM driv e. Note The CD R OM driv e cannot b e lo cally-moun ted on a diskless no de, although its driv er m ust be conîgured in to eac h cluster no de's k ernel. This section deals with the follo wing topics: Installing the CD R OM with SAM. T esting the installation. Moun ting the new CD R OM. Remo ving and inserting ad i s c . The factory-set SCSI address for this device: SCSI bus address: 2 As it is p ossible that the CD R OM driv e ma y b e s hipp ed with a d iîeren t S CSI bus setting, please see the Instal lation Guide for the device for guidance on resetting it, if necessary . Inserting the disc in y our CD ROM driv e. Note that a rigid p lastic caddy holds and p rotects the d isc. Before inserting the disc, mak es u r e y ou ha v e t he disc installed i n t he appropriate disc caddy . When inserted i n to the disc p o rt, d ata is read f rom t he disc through a sh utter in the c addy . When y ou eject the caddy , t he sh utter closes to protect t he disc's data surface. The disc caddy for a n H P u pgrade driv e, suc ha s the H P A2644A, is not in terc hangeable w ith t he HP C1707A C D R OM Driv e d isc c addy .H o w ev er, 6-18 Configuring HP-UX for Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 y ou can remo v e the disc from one caddy and use the other, if necessary , in order to ît the appropriate driv e. Disc caddies are a v ailable from Hewlett-P ac k ard. Caution Do not op en the disc caddy sh utter man ually . Op ening the sh utter will exp ose t he disc's data surface t o dust and damage. I f the data surface gets to o m uc h dust or damage, its readabilit y b y the CD R OM driv e's laser read head will b e reduced. Installing the CD ROM Driv e with SAM It is a go o d idea to mak e a note of y our C D R OM driv e mo del and its hardw are address (select co de and bus address), b efore y ou do the soft w are installation. CD R OM Mo del: Bus Address: Configuring the Driv e on HP-UX: 1. Log in as root . 2. Run SAM b y t yping the follo wing: $ /usr/bin/sam 3. Cho ose N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N Disks and File Systems-> . 4. Cho ose NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N CD-ROM, Floppy, and Hard Disks . 5. F rom the N N N NN NN NN NN NN NN NN N N N N N N Actions men ubar in the \Disk and File System Manager" windo w, highligh t a nd c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N Add a H ard Disk Drive... 6. Within the \ Add a Hard Disk Driv e" windo w, c ho ose NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNN Select Disk to Add . 7. Within the NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN N Select a Disk to Add windo w, highligh t the line i den tifying the n ew driv ey ou ha v e just connected. It will b e describ e d a s, for e xample, Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-19
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 \CD R OM-SCSI", follo w ed b y its mo del n um b er and bus address. Activ ate N N N N N NN N OK . If the device y ou ha v e connected d o es not app ear on the list: a. Chec k y our hardw are connections, and mak e sure that the device is turned on and that there is a disc in it. b. Activ ate the button N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N Device Missing , and y ou will b eg i v en the follo wing options: i. Ha v eS A M rescan the system for the device. If y ou ha v e connected the device after starting SAM, y ou should activ ate N N N N N N N N N N N Yes . Otherwise, activ ate N NN N N N N N No . ii. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether the device is connected and p o w ered up. iii. Resp ond to the conîrmation screen regarding whether additional device driv ers are needed. iv. Y ou will b e giv en an information screen suggesting things to try if the device still cannot b e found. If this is the case, y ou will need to consult Instal ling Peripher als . 8. If y ou need to add driv ers t o the k ernel, SAM will prompt y ou for doing so and will ask whether y ou wish to recreate the k ernel no w or later. Mak e this selection b y pressing 4 Return 5 when y our selection is highligh ted. Then the selection is designated b y an asterisk (*) in its blank. Activ ate N NN NN N N N OK to en ter that selection. 9. N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Set Disk Usage and Options . (File system usage is already set for a CD R OM.) En ter the moun t directory where y ou w an t the C D R OM to b e. 10. N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N Modify Defaults... . (This task i s o ptional). Y ou ma yw an tt o c hange certain options, suc h a s w hen to moun t t he disk and h o w i ts access p ermissions are set. If so, w ithin the NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Add a Hard D isk Drive windo w, highligh t a nd activ ate NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNN Modify Defaults . Then, w ithin the d ialog b o x, select o r m o d ify the options that apply . 11. Activ ate NNNNNNNN OK when y ou ha v e î nished with the m ain NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NN Add a Hard Disk Drive form. 6-20 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 12. A \Messages" Bo xa p p ears, rep orting the progress of the task. When the task is înished, activ ate 4 OK 5 . 13. Exit SAM b y returning to op ening screen a nd activ ating 4 Exit SAM 5 . T esting Y our Installation A simple test to mak e certain that ev erything has b een installed correctly is to execute the command diskinfo . 1. First mak es u r e aC D R OM is inserted in the driv e. 2. Then, t yp e the follo wing (using the appropriate device île name as the argumen t). F or example: diskinfo /dev/rdsk/2s0 If the disk is installed correctly , diskinfo will displa y a listing of information ab out it, suc h as the follo wing: 2s0 SCSI describe of /dev/rdsk/2s0 vendor: TOSHIBA product id: CD-ROM DRIVE:XM type: CD-ROM size: nnnnnn Kbytes bytes per sector: 2048 Mounting the New C D ROM Driv e SAM will moun t the disc for y ou when y ou install the driv e. Y ou can then moun t it and unmoun ti t man ually ,u s i n g the mount and umount commands, as with a îexible disk. If y ou ha v en o t already h ad SAM d o s o, in order for y our system t o b o o t with the new CD R OM moun ted, y ou will need to edit y our /etc/checklist .A d d the f ollo wing line to the /etc/checklist île: /dev/dsk/2s0 /cdrom c dfs r o 0 0 # CD ROM If y ou ha v e only made this c hange to y our system, executing mount - a will moun t t he new d isk automatically , a nd it will sta ym o u n ted u n til y ou unmoun t Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-21
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 it man ually . (Note that using the -a option moun ts al l unmoun ted devices in /etc/checklist .) After moun ting a new disk on a directory , an ll listing of the directory should giv e y ou at least one île or directory en try . F or example: total 1024 drwxr-xr-x 2 root root 8192 Aug 31 15:24 îlename See the next section for information on unmoun ting the disc b efore y ou remo v e it. Remo ving and I nserting a D isc Y ou m ust moun t a CD R OM disc ev ery time y ou insert it in to the driv e, and y ou m ust unmoun t the disc b efore the system w ill allo w y ou to eject it from the driv e. Note The eject button on the CD R OM driv e is disabled w hile the device is moun ted or in use. 6-22 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Before y ou remo v e a disc: 1. F or example, if the disc is designated b y the blo c k device île /dev/dsk/2s0 , temp orarily unmoun t the disk's île system b y executing the follo wing: umount /dev/dsk/2s0 2. Press the eject button to remo v e the disk After y ou insert a disk: 1. Moun t the CD R OM île system so that HP-UX will recognize it. If, for example, y ou are moun ting the C D R OM designated b y the device îlename /dev/dsk/2s0 , create a directory /cdrom (if it do esn't exist already) and execute the follo wing: mount /dev/dsk/2s0 /cdrom (Note t hat the directory /cdrom , in the example, m ust b e giv en as an absolute path name). In this example, the mount command announces to the system that a remo v able île system is to b e attac hed at the directory /cdrom . This directory b ecomes the name of the ro ot of the newly-moun ted île system. 2. No w y ou can access the CD R OM as y ou w ould an y other disk, except that y ou cannot write to it. 3. A îashing busy ligh t indicates normal activit yw i t h the s ystem. For More Information F or more information on the mount , umount , and reboot commands, please see the appropriate en tries in HP-UX R efer enc e . Y ou can also use y our online command help system b yt yping man , follo w ed b y t he name of the command, and 4 Return 5 . Information o n t he installation of external p e ripheral devices can b e found i n Instal ling Peripher als . Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-23
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Configuring for a DDS T ape Driv e This section con tains instructions for conîguring a new DDS driv e on HP-UX. The DDS (\Digital Data Storage") T ap e Driv e is a sequen tial-access, read-write device using remo v able DDS cassettes. Although DDS d riv es are similar to D A T pla y ers in the audio industry , the cassettes are not in terc hangeable. There are t w o ma jor diîerences: 1. Audio cassette tap es transfer data in streaming mo de. That i s, they are left in motion for p erio ds of min utes. T ap es used for data are con tin ually starting, stopping and rep ositioning, whic h is stressful to the tap e. DDS tap es are made rugged enough to stand this kind of treatmen t. Audio tap es are not exp ected to p erform this w ell, and a s a result fail v ery quic kly in a data en vironmen t. 2. DDS cassettes ha v e a m uc h tigh ter case dimension sp eciîcation than D A T cassettes. As a result, D A T c assettes can get stuc k in a DDS driv e, requiring the driv e to b e disassem bled. F or this reason, only Hewlett-P ac k ard supp orted or prop erly certiîed DDS tap e cartridges should b e used. Use of D A Tt a p es in tended for audio use could v oid y our w arran t y . Caution Do not attempt to extricate a D A T cassette whic h is stuc k in aD D S driv e. Y ou ma y damage the driv e. Ha v e the driv e disassem bled b y someone qualiîed to do so. 6-24 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 The steps for adding a DDS tap e driv e to y our system are: 1. Mak e sure that the necessary device driv ers are conîgured in to the k ernel. SAM will mak e this test. 2. Cho ose a SCSI bus address for the new tap e driv e that do es not matc h the bus address for an y other SCSI device. 3. Sh ut y our system do wn and turn oî the p o w er. 4. Mak e all necessary hardw are connections for the device. 5. T urn the new tap e driv e on . 6. T urn y our system on . 7. Run SAM to create the device îles for the new tap e driv e. The factory-set SCSI address for the DDS driv e: F or an upgrade driv e: SCSI bus address: 3 As it is p ossible that the SCSI bus address jump ers for an upgrade ma y be shipp ed with diîeren t settings, please c hec k the settings b efore installing the device. See the Instal lation Guide for the device for information on resetting it, should it b e necessary . Configuring the Driv e on HP-UX The SAM N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Peripherals Devices ! N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Tape Drives pro cedure will conîrm whic h driv ers are activ e for y our tap e devices and will conîgure them as needed, for connected devices. Reconîguring the k ernel w ill in v olv e reb o oting y our system. Configuring H P-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es 6-25
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Before Y ou Begin: First mak e a note of the tap e driv e mo del and its hardw are address (SCSI bus address) so that y ou will b e able to iden tify i t later. DDS Driv eM o del: Bus Address: 1. Log in as root . 2. Run SAM b yt yping t he follo wing: $ /usr/bin/sam T o get help in SAM, pressing the 4 f1 5 k ey giv es y ou con text-sensitiv e information for the ob ject at the lo cation of the cursor. 3. Highligh t and select N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N Peripheral Devices -> 4. A t the next screen highligh t and select N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Tape Drives -> 5. The N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Tape Drive Manager screen lists what tap e devices are connected, including y our new device. Highligh t that device. 6. F rom the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N N N Actions men u, c ho ose N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN Add... . A message screen giv es y ou the hardw are steps for adding the tap e driv e. Activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . 7. A conîrmation screen indicates whether an y related device driv ers needed to b e added to the k ernel. Activ ate N N N N N NN NN NN Yes or press 4 Return 5 . 8. If y ou needed to add a device driv er, y ou will also need to create a new k ernel a nd (ev en tually) reb o ot the system. Select from the men u on the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Create a New K ernel screen whether y ou w an tt o create the new k ernel no w, later, or cancel the prop osed mo diîcations. (Mak e sure y our c hoice has an asterisk placed b yi t , b y p ressing N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N N NN N Return while that line is highligh ted.) Activ ate NNNNNNNN OK to conîrm y our c hoice of action. 9. Y ou will next b e giv en a c hoice of whether to install the new k ernel no w or later. If y ou mo v et h e k ernel i n to place n o w, the system will also reb o ot. I f y ou c ho ose to do it later, y ou can t hen mo v e t he new k ernel, /etc/conf/dfile.SAM to /hp-ux and r eb o o t. Y ou should also mo v e /etc/conf/dfile.SAM to /etc/conf/dfile at the s ame t ime. 6-26 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 If y ou reb o ot, the old k ernel will b e bac k ed up as /SYSBCKUP . 10. Exit SAM, if y ou ha v e not already done so. Note If y ou are mo difying a cluster clien t's k ernel, its k ernel is not bac k ed up, since /SYSBCKUP is used exclusiv ely for the cluster serv er's k ernel. Y our system is no w running the added driv er for SCSI DDS tap e driv e. Y ou are ready t o use the driv e to load a tap e in to y our system. T esting Y our Installation Note that a write-protect tab on the cassette allo ws y ou to protect data from b eing o v er-written. Y ou will need to mak e sure that the tab is mo v ed to the \writable" p osition in order for it to serv e as a bac k up medium. A simple test to mak e certain that ev erything has b een i nstalled satisfactorily is to load a tap e in the driv e, w ait for the \busy" ligh t to stop blinking, and execute the ioscan command: /etc/ioscan The LED on the driv e should îic k er brieîy . If the command completes successfully , a listing of y our devices, including the tap e hardw are address, name and status will b e displa y ed, indicating that it is installed correctly .N o t e that the command ma y fail with a busy error if the command is executed b efore the t ap eh a s completed loading. Configuring H P-UX for Printers a nd Driv es 6-27
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 DDS T ape Driv e LED Indicators Tw o LED indicators on the driv e's fron t panel indicate sev eral op erational and test states. The follo wing tables sho w the LED com binations and explains what they indicate. DDS T ape Driv e LED Symbols Used in T able 6-1 6-28 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 T able 6-1. DDS T ape Driv e LED State Codes Caution Indicator The DDS d riv e con tin ually m onitors the n um b e r o f e rrors i t h as to correct when reading or writing a tap e. This i nformation is presen ted to the u ser through t he Caution Indicator ( see a b o v ec hart). A caution indication has t w o common m eanings: The tap e heads need cleaning. The tap e i tself i s approac hing the e nd of its useful life. Configuring H P-UX for P rinters a nd Driv es 6-29
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 6 Maximum Usage of DDS Cassettes Under optimal en vironmen tal conditions (50% relativ eh umidit y , 22 î C), Hewlett-P ac k ard DDS cassettes are curren tly sp eciîed to 2000 passes o v er an y part of the tap e. In op erational terms, this can be translated in to appro ximately 200 t o 300 bac kup o p erations. This tak es in to accoun t that, during a bac kup, an area of tap e ma y ha v e sev eral passes b ecause streaming cannot b e main tained, or b ecause the bac kup soft w are r equires that certain areas of the t ap ea r e accessed f requen tly . Under certain conditions, the recommended n um b er of bac kup op erations needs to b e reduced. These conditions are as follo ws: Sustained use at lo w h umidit y . Use in a lo w-p erformance w orkstation, requiring an increased n um b er of passes. Bac kup s oft w are requiring certain areas of the tap e b eing accessed frequen tly . As a guideline, HP recommends that the n um b er of bac kup op erations should b e limited to 100 p er cassette in extreme cases of the ab o v e conditions. In Case of Difficulty If y ou exp erience an y problems with the op eration of the new driv e, con tact y our HP service represen tativ e for assistance. 6-30 Configuring HP-UX f or Printers and D riv es
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 7 Dealing with Problems Chapter Contents In terpreting Error Messages During Bo ot. In terpreting the LED Indicators. Dealing with HP VUE P roblems. Re-Setting the VRX Sp ecial Device Files with mkno d. Managing a Bo ot F ailure. Reco v ering from a System P anic. Dealing with Net w ork F ailures. Dealing w ith P roblems 7-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Interpreting Error Messages During Boot When y ou turn on y our con troller, an error message suc h as the follo wing indicates that a hardw are problem with the Bo ot R OM or its asso ciated circuits o c curred: Configuration E EPROM Failed Configure Mode Failed Refer to T able 7-1 for p ossible error messages y ou ma y see when e n tering Conîguration Mo de. T able 7-1. Configuration Mode Entry Error Messages Error Message Meaning and Action (No error message) If Conîguration Mo de do es not start and no error message app ears, a hardw are failure probably o ccurred. Configure Mode Failed Configuration EEPROM Failed One or more of these situations exists: All of the in terface v alues ha v e b een set to their default (factory) v alues. Some default and some c hanged v alues ha v e b een set. All t he in terface v alues ha v e b een set to their c hanged v alues. Some minor error o ccurred that should not aîect the conîgurations for the in terface. Chec k the B o ot Mo de Selection and In terface Conîguration Mo des f or y our con troller a nd v erify they are correct f or y our a pplication. EEPROM Has Bad Information Conîguration M o d e s tarted, main men u ma y a pp ear, but s omething failed. T ry again. 7-2 Dealing w ith Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 T able 7-1. Configuration Mode Entry Error Messages (continued) Error Message Meaning and Action EEPROM Load Section Missing Could not load new conîguration data. Hardw are failure. EEPROM Defaults Section Missing Default conîgurations could not b e found. Hardw are failure. Too much data to save T o o man y in terfaces for EEPR OM to manage. Reconîgure con troller with few er in terfaces. If the Bo ot R OM or EEPR OM has problems after y ou en ter one of the conîguration commands (also see App endix A), the m o de lines displa y one of the error messages sho wn in the follo wing table. T able 7-2. Configuration Mode Exit Error Messages Command Error Message Meaning and Action N or D Too many configuration saves More than 64,000 sa v es w ere tried. Unlik ely to o c cur. N or D Cannot save new configuration Something prev en ted sa ving the new conîguration. Hardw are failure. Con tact y our HP Service Engineer. N or D EEPROM cannot save information EEPR OM ma y not sa v e an y or all of the new conîguration information. Hardw are failure. Con tact y our H P S ervice Engineer. A (No message s hould app ear) No error messages should app ear when y ou ab ort c onîguration mo de and reset y our c on troller. Dealing w ith P roblems 7-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Interpreting the LED Indicators There a re eigh t diagnostic LEDs on the system b oard, whic h y ou can view through a slot on the rear panel. Figure 7-1. Rear P anel Viewing Slot for Diagnostic LEDs These giv e normal indications for HP-UX when it is running, as sho wn in T able 7-3 . Some of these LEDs will alw a ys b e blinking during normal op eration. T able 7-3. Normal LED Displa y During HP-UX Operation LED Displa y (A through D Flashing) Meaning A B C D E F G H î î î î î î î î Op erating system running î î î î î î î î Disk access in progress î î î î î î î î Net w ork receiv e i n p rogress î î î î î î î î Net w ork t ransmit i n p rogress 7-4 Dealing w ith Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 The indications in T able 7-4 refer to conditions whic h migh t happ en during b o ot, including b o ot failures, b efor e HP-UX is running: T able 7-4. Diagnostic LED Displa y During Boot LED Displa y (During Bo ot) Status Remedy AB CD EF G H î î î î î î î î No failure. î î î î î î î î F ailed CPU register test. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î î î T esting the top 16 Kb yte of memory . î î î î î î î î T op 16 Kb yte of memory failed. î î î î î î î î T op 16 Kb yte of memory missing or not found. Chec k memory in slot 0 and 1 . î î î î î î î î Searc hing for user-supplied extension R OM. î î î î î î î î Started executing extension R OM instructions. î î î î î î î î Starting t est v ector list. î î î î î î î î Resetting all in terfaces. î î î î î î î î Searc hing for console displa y . Dealing w ith P roblems 7-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 T able 7-4. Diagnostic LED Displa y During Boot (continued) LED Displa y (During Bo ot) Status Remedy îî îî îî îî IODC test RAM under test. î î î î î î î î Console failure. Replace CPU b oard. î îî îî î î î F ailed Bo ot R OM c hec ksum. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î î î Preloading memory for main test. î î î î î î î î T esting memory . î î î î î î î î Insuîcien t memory . Replace slot 0 and 1 memory m o dule. î îî îî îî î R OM system failure. Replace R OM system. î î î î î î î î Bo ot error. Replace CPU b oard. îî î î î î î î Op erating system tried to load at to o high memory address. T ry b o oting again, or replace CPU or 68040 IC. î î î î î î î î Not enough memory to load op erating system. Add more memory . î î î î î î î î F ailure during system scan. î îî î î î î î 4 msec. timer problem. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î îî îî EEPR OM malformed. î îî îî îî î F ailure o f HP-HIL circuit. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î îî F ailure of HP-IB circuit. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î î î F ailure of DMA circuit. Replace CPU b oard. î î î î î î î î F ailure of DIO-I in terface at select co de iden tiîed b y îv e lo w est LEDs. Replace CPU b oard. 7-6 Dealing w ith Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Dealing with HP VUE Problems If y ou activ ate HP VUE and exp erience an y problems, it is probable that one of the follo wing is the source of the diîcult y . If no HP VUE login screen app ears: Log i n on y our system console, if p ossible. Start \Do ctor VUE" b y en tering the follo wing: /usr/contrib/bin/X11/dr_vue | more Examine the displa y ed output from dr_vue . It detects errors in v arious conîguration îles. There are sev eral reasons that HP VUE migh t fail to start: The îleset con taining HP VUE is not installed prop erly . The île that con trols system startup, /etc/inittab , ma y not b e conîgured prop erly . The X serv er has n ot started prop erly . The X serv er is sp eciîed in the île /usr/vue/config/Xservers . Dealing w ith P roblems 7-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Logging In With HP VUE When All Else F ails 1. Select N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N Options . 2. Cho ose NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN N Fail-safe S ession . 3. Select (highligh t) the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Login b o x. 4. T yp e y our login name. 5. Press 4 Return 5 . 6. T yp e y our passw ord. 7. Press 4 Return 5 or activ ate N N N N N N N N OK . When y ou log in to a fail-safe session, a windo w app ears with a command-line prompt in it, giving enough of an en vironmen ts o that y ou can use the command line to remedy problems or edit fault y conîguration îles. See the HP VUE User's Guide for more information. 7-8 Dealing w ith Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Re-Setting the VRX Special Device Files with mknod The sp ecial device île for the in ternal VRX graphics hardw are used in the Mo del 382 should already b e set up correctly as /dev/crt b y the s ystem bo ot co de. I f /dev/crt do es not exist, is deleted for some reason, or do es not allo w the device driv er access to the hardw are, use the information b elo w to create a new /dev/crt . The mknod command creates a sp ecial device île whic h is used to comm unicate be t w een the SPU and the in ternal graphics. Sup eruser status is required to set up sp ecial device îles. See the HP-UX R efer enc e , section 1M, for more information on the mknod command. The correct mknod command syn tax to create a DIO I I bus sp ecial device île for the in ternal En try Lev el VRX graphics hardw are is: mknod /dev/crt c 12 0x840300 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ | | | | -> 00 = (Use db y Starb ase) | | | ---> 03 = SGC-typ e c ar d | | -----> 84 = SGC slot numb er (=DIO SC 132 ) | ----------> 12 = Gr aphics devic e ------------> c = Char acter b ase d devic e Dealing w ith P roblems 7-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Managing a Boot F ailure The b o ot program is lo cated in the Bo ot R OM of y our con troller. Here are some things to c hec k if something has gone wrong at this p oin t in the b o ot pro cess: 1. Boot Program Initializes Hardw are Problems during this îrst stage of the b o ot pro cess are rare. A t this stage problems can b e caused b y: No p o w er to the con troller (c hec k y our building's circuit break ers and the p o w er connections to y our con troller equipmen t) Pro cessor hardw are failure In terface card hardw are failure Incorrectly connected in ternal SCSI cable. T urn oî the p o w er to the con troller (lea v e an y external disks p o w ered up and running). W ait îv e or ten seconds and turn the p o w er to the con troller bac k on. If the problem reo ccurs, record the symptoms, the status of an y indicators (esp ecially an y LED displa ys) on y our pro cessor, and an y messages that app ear on y our system console. A t this stage in the b o ot pro cess, most of the problems that oc c u r require y our hardw are to b e serviced b y a p erson trained and qualiîed to do so. 2. Boot Program Loads a Secondary Loader Program In this step the bo ot program attempts to load and run a secondary loader program t hat w ill b e c apable of loading and running HP-UX. The most lik ely problem at this stage is the b o o t p rogram b eing u nable t o l o c ate t he secondary loader program. If the b o ot program can't l o c ate a secondary loader, y ou will see t he message \ Searching For a System "i n t h e l o w er left corner of y our d ispla y .V erify that at least one device is p o w ered on and in a r eady state (it m ust also ha v ea Secondary Loader Program, o f c ourse). 7-10 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 This symptom could also indicate that no k ernel w as found (see the next phase for details). 3. Boot Program finds the WRONG secondary loader Another p ossible problem at this stage is that the b o ot program do es înd a secondary loader program, but the one it înds is the w rong one. On the Mo del 382, there is a particular sequence the b oo t program u ses to lo cate a secondary loader program. The b o ot program will use the îrst one it înds, and it ma y înd one b efore it reac hes the one y ou w an t it to use. It ma y also attempt to b o ot from in v alid disks whic h w ere laid out using newfs without the -n option. (See App endix A for the pro cedure for setting up automatic op erating s ystem selection.) If y ou are b o oting from a LAN where more than one v alid cluster serv er exists, the îrst serv er to resp ond is the one that y our system will b o ot from. It ma y b e unpredictable whic h serv er will resp ond îrst. Moreo v er, the one that resp onds ma y not b e the one y ou w an t. F or a serv er to resp ond to a b o ot request from y our system, it m ust ha v e y our con troller conîgured in its /etc/clusterconf île. Therefore, unless y our conîguration requires m ultiple op erating systems, y ou should nev er ha v e more than one serv er on y our LAN with your system deîned in its /etc/clusterconf île. 4. Secondary Loader Program Loads HP-UX A t t his stage, the secondary loader program attempts to load and start up HP-UX itself. There are t w o things that can go wrong: 1. The secondary loader program can't înd HP-UX 2. The secondary loader program loads the wrong v ersion of HP-UX 5. Secondary Loader P rogram can't find HP-UX The secondary loader program w ill displa y a list of the v alid k ernels that it înds. When it b e gins its searc h for these k ernels, it prin ts the message \ Searching For a System ". If it do esn't înd a n yv alid k ernels, nothing further will b e displa y ed. Dealing with Problems 7-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 If after a few min utes, nothing app ears to happ en, y our system probably can't înd a k ernel to b o ot. If y ou're certain that a v alid k ernel resides on one of y our devices, re-c hec k the status of the d evice (see the follo wing list \P ossible Problem Areas"). If y ou are attempting to b o ot from a lo cal device suc h as a disk driv e, and if the device is turned on and conîgured prop erly , y our k ernel île m a y b e missing or corrupted. I f y ou ha v e another system to whic h y ou can attac h the disk driv e, y ou can moun t the île system to that system and c hec k for the presence of a v alid k ernel. If y ou cannot înd o ne or if y ou do not ha v e another system to moun t y our disk on, y ou can re-install HP-UX follo wing the original installation pro cedures. Boot Device Problems The follo wing are p ossible b oo t device problems whic h could cause b o ot failure: The device is not p o w ered on and in a ready state. The device is not conîgured for the correct address (suc h as an HP-IB address). The cable connecting the device to the con troller is incorrect or not tigh tly connected to the correct lo cation. If y ou are attempting to b o ot an HP-UX clien t o v er a LAN, c hec k the follo wing: The cluster serv er is running. The rbootd daemon is running on the serv er. The cluster serv er has y our con troller conîgured in its /etc/clusterconf île. The LANIC i.d. îeld in /etc/clusterconf matc hes t he LAN i .d. found b y the B o o t R OM. The île /hp-ux is a Con text Dep enden t F ile (CDF). Also, b e s ure t here is an elemen t i n the CDF t hat corresp onds to the clien ty ou're t rying t o b o ot. 7-12 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 For M ore Information If y ou need more detail on b o oting or reconîguring y our system, please see System A dministr ation T asks or Solving HP-UX Pr oblems . Dealing w ith P roblems 7-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Reco v ering from a System P anic In HP-UX terms, a system panic simply means that the op erating system encoun tered a condition that it did not kno w ho w to resp ond to, so it halted y our con troller. System panics are rare and not alw a ys the result of a catastrophe. They sometimes o ccur at b o ot if y our system w as previously not sh ut do wn prop erly . Sometimes they o ccur as the result of a hardw are failure. In a clustered en vironmen t, a diskless clien t no de will panic if to o m uc h time has elapsed since its last comm unication with its serv er. This could b e the result of nothing more than a LAN cable that has b een disconnected for to o long. Reco v ering from a system panic can b e as simple as reb o oting y our system. If y ou ha v ea n up-to-date set of île system bac kup or system reco v ery tap es, the worst c ase scenario w ould in v olv e reinstalling HP-UX and restoring a n yî l e s that w ere lost or corrupted. If this situation w as caused b y a rare hardw are failure suc ha s ad i s k head crash, y ou will, of course, ha v e to ha v e the hardw are îxed b efore y ou can p erform the reinstallation. Note It is imp ortan t to main tain an up-to-date bac kup of the îles on y our system so that, in the ev en to f a disk head crash or similar situation, y ou can reco v er y our data. Ho w frequen tly y ou up date these bac kups dep ends on ho w m uc h data y ou can aîord to lose. F or information on ho wt o bac k up data, refer to System A dministr ation T asks . 7-14 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Should y our system ha v e this problem, it is imp ortan t to record and categorize the circumstances asso ciated with the panic: Summary Checklist of P ossible Causes of P anics Problem Area Some Correctiv e Actions: Hardw are If the failure app ears to b e asso ciated with the p e ripheral: Chec k the in tegrit y of the cable c onnections. Ensure that the p eripheral is online. If the ab o v ed i d not correct the problem, the failure ma y b e asso ciated with the System Pro c essing Unit. In this case, call y our designated service represen tativ e. File System Run the île s ystem c hec k er, fsck , to correct the problem. F ollo w the instructions that fsck ma y giv e, and use the -n option with an y subsequen t reb o ots required b y fsck . See Chapter 6 \File System Problems," in Solving HP-UX Pr oblems for detailed information. LAN Ensure the in tegrit y of all LAN connections, including taps in an y A UI cable. Chec k for prop er 50 ohm terminations at b oth ends of the LAN. Other Reb oo t the system Dealing w ith P roblems 7-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Procedures for Reco v ering from a System P anic Step 1: Note the P anic Message Record the panic message displa y ed on the system console. Step 2: Categorize the P anic Message The panic message will tell y ou wh y HP-UX panic k ed. Sometimes panic messages refer to in ternal structures of HP-UX (or its île systems) and the cause migh t not be ob vious. Generally , the problem is in one of the follo wing categories, and w ording of the message should allo w y ou to classify it in to one of them: Category Action Step Num b er Hardw are F ailure Step 3a File System Corrupted Step 3b LAN Comm unication Problem Step 3c Other S ituations Step 3d Step 3a: Reco v ery from Hardw are F ailure If the panic message indicated a hardw are failure, the text or con text of the message should indicate what piece of hardw are failed. If the hardw are failure app ears to b e a sso ciated with a p eripheral, c hec k to b e sure that its cables are tigh tly connected to their prop er lo cations and that the device is p o w ered o n and in an \online" state. If there is an error indicated on the device's displa y: 1. Keep a l og b o ok and record error messages i n it. 2. T urn the device o î. 3. If the device is a disk driv e, w ait f or it to stop spinning. 4. T urn the device b ac ko n . 7-16 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 If the problem reapp ears on the device or if the hardw are failure app ears to b e asso ciated with an in terface card or an in ternal comp onen t of the system mo dule, y ou should refer t he problem t o y our HP service represen tativ e. Pro ceed to Step 4 ( \Reb o oting Y our System"). Step 3b: Reco v ering from a File System Problem If the panic message indicates a problem with one of y our île s ystems, y ou will need t o run t he île system c hec k er fsck (1m) to c hec k and correct the problem(s). This is normally done automatically at b o ot time (from the /etc/rc île) so y ou should pro ceed to step 4 (reb o oting y our s ystem). F ollo w all directions that fsck giv es y ou esp e cial ly if it is your r o ot île system (the one with the \/" d ir e ctory) that has the pr oblem . It is imp ortan t to use the \ -n " option to the r eb o ot (1m) command if requested to do so b y fsck during an y subsequen t reb o ot. Step 3c: Reco v ering from a LAN Communication Problem If the panic messages i ndicates a problem with LAN comm unication (suc h as when a diskless cluster clien t no de is prev en ted from comm unication for to o long), c hec k all LAN cable connections to b e sure of the follo wing: All connectors are tigh tly fastened to the LAN cable and the media access units (MA U's). LAN is assem bled correctly and d o es not exceed recommended lengths. If y ou use an A UI, the LAN m ust b e connected dir e ctly to the MA U with no in terv ening length of cable b et w een the MA U on y our con troller to the LAN tee. Y our LAN is prop erly terminated. Pro ceed to step 4 (reb o oting y our system). Step 3d: R eco v ering from Other Situations When y ou susp e ct the p roblem w as something other t han the a b o v e ( or when y ou do not k no w where to classify it), p ro ceed t o s tep 4 \ R eb o oting your system ." In this case, it is esp e cial ly imp ortan t that y ou write do wn the exact text of the p anic message, just in case y ou need it for future troublesho o ting or help from H P s ervice p e rsonnel. Dealing w ith P roblems 7-17
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Step 4: Rebooting Y our System Once y ou ha v e c hec k ed for and corrected an y problems from Step 3, y ou are ready to reb o ot y our system. If y our system h as not gotten past the system selection phase of the bo ot pro cess, i t is safe to turn it oî and then bac k on to initiate the b o ot sequence. Y ou will probably notice a few diîerences in b o ot b eha vior as compared with y our normal b o ot sequence. Y our con troller migh th a v e sa v ed a \core" île to disk. This core île is a \ snapshot" of the previously running k ernel at the time that it panic k ed. If necessary , this core île can b e analyzed using sp ecial to ols to determine what caused the panic. Note Core îles a re quite large and are sa v ed to the directory /tmp/syscore . If y ou feel y ou need to sa v e these îles for future analysis (something that isn't usually required), it is b est to sa v e them to tap e and remo v e them from y our île system in order to free up space. If y ou know wh y y our system panic k ed, y ou can delete the core îles; it is unnecessary to k eep them. The core îles are used in rare circumstances to diagnose hard-to-înd causes of system panics. If the reason y our system panic k ed w as b ecause of a corrupted île system, the fsck utilit y will rep ort the errors and an y corrections it mak es. If the problems w ere asso ciated with y our ro ot île system, fsck will return a message to reb oo t y our system when it is înished. In this case, use the follo wing command: reboot -n The -n option tells the reboot command not to sync the île system b efore reb o oting. Since fsck has made all the corrections on disk, y ou do not w an t to undo the c hanges b y writing o v er them with t he corrupt m emory buîers. Step 5: Monitor the system closely If y our system successfully b o ots, y ou can r esume normal op erations. Man y system p anics are isolated ev en ts and are unlik ely to reo ccur. 7-18 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Chec k y our applications to b e sure that they are running prop erly and monitor the system closely . Y ou should also do bac kups more frequen tly un til y ou are conîden t that the system is functioning prop erly . For Further Information . . . See Solving HP-UX Pr oblems and System A dministr ation T asks for further information on problems relating to the op erating system. T o restore a corrupted op erating system, see the pro cedures for restoring in Chapter 5 of this man ual. Dealing w ith P roblems 7-19
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n 7 Dealing with Netw ork F ailures If the program y ou ha v e b een running uses resources from a lo cal area net w ork and it stops unexp ectedly , the follo wing ma y h elp lo cate the s ource of the problem: T able 7-5. Problems with the Netw ork Problem Action No systems resp ond to the /etc/ping hostname command. Chec k the net w ork connection at the bac k of y our w orkstation. Mak e sure that the cable is securely fastened to the appropriate connector. Y our s ystem do es not resp ond t o /etc/ping from another system on the net w ork. Chec kt o see if the net w orking soft w are is still running on y our system. If it is not running, restart i t b y logging on to y our system as sup eruser and running /etc/rc . Some systems resp ond to /etc/ping , but others do not. Con tact y our net w ork administrator, if y ou ha v e one. This condition either indicates that s ome systems are do wn, or that there is a fault with the net w ork. 7-20 Dealing with Problems
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A A Configuring the Boot ROM Appendix Contents Using the Bo ot R OM Conîguration Mo de for HP-UX Conîguring for Automatic Op erating System Selection Configuring the Boot ROM A-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A Using the Boot ROM Configuration Mode The Bo ot R OM conîguration mo de is used for in ternal in terface conîgurations or Auto System Selection for y our con troller. Conîgure Mo de is run and con trolled b yt h e Bo ot R OM. Y ou do not need to ha v ea n op erating system i nstalled to use Conîgure Mo de. If the op erating system is installed and y ou w an t to en ter Conîgure Mo de, y ou m ust prev en t the op erating system from b o oting. Instructions are pro vided in this c hapter. 1 T urning on y our monitor and y our con troller. The p o w er-up displa y will app ear. 2 If y our HP-UX op erating system has b een installed, y ou m ust prev en tt h e op erating system from b o oting shortly after turning y our con troller on. As so on as the follo wing line app ears in y our p o w er-up displa y press t he 4 space ba r 5 to prev en t HP-UX from b o oting: ... HP-HIL.Keyboard (Y ou wil l he ar a double-b e ep) ... Y ou will still see the p o w er-up displa y , but HP-UX will not b o ot. 3 With the p o w er-up displa y sho wn on y our monitor, press these k eys t o en ter Conîguration Mo de: 4 C 5 4 Return 5 A-2 Configuring the Boot ROM
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A 4 Y ou should see this men u app ear in the upp er righ t-hand corner of the p o w er-up displa y: Configuration Control Keys Control Class ----------------------- 1 I/O Configuration 2 Auto System Selection A Abort without changes ----------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? The ? prompt b elo w the men u indicates y our con troller is w aiting for an input. T o resp ond, press an appropriate n um b er or letter k ey , follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . If y ou no w w an t to c hange the I/O conîguration of y our con troller, go on to the next section. If y ou w an t to lea v e Conîguration Con trol without making an yc hanges, en ter \ A " follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . The system will reset and run the p o w er-up self test. Configuring t he Boot ROM A-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A Modifying I/O Configuration Information Conîguration settings are stored in a part of memory called an EEPR OM (\Electronically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory"). Information stored in the EEPR OM remains in tact ev en when y our con troller is turned oî. T able A-1 lists the factory-set default c onîgurations for y our E EPR OM. T able A-1. Built-In Interface Default V alues Built-In In terface F unction Default Conîguration Options SCSI Select Co de 14 0 to 31 In terrupt Lev el 4 3 to 6 Bus Address 7 0 to 7 P arit y Y es Y es/No LAN Select Co de 21 0 to 31 In terrupt Lev el 5 3 to 6 HP P arallel Select Co de 12 0 to 31 In terrupt Lev el 3 3 to 6 HP-IB System-Con troller option y es y es/no RS232 Select Co de 9 0 to 31 in terrupt lev el 5 3 to 6 Remote/Lo cal L R or L Mo dem Enable y es y es/no F ollo w these instructions to en ter and use I/O Conîguration Men u. En ter the follo wing: 1 4 Return 5 A-4 Configuring the Boot ROM
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A This Conîgurable In terfaces men u replaces the Conîguration Con trol men u: Configurable Interfaces Keys Interface Select Code ---------------------------- 1 LAN 21 2 HP-IB 3 SCSI 14 4 HP Parallel 12 5 RS-232 9 N store New values D store Default values (then cycle SPU power) A A bort without changes ---------------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? Eac h of the three commands is explained b elo w. P ossible Resp onse F unction and Meaning 4 N 5 Stores all the listed new v alues y ou en tered in the E EPR OM. Y ou can turn oî y our con troller, and then turn it bac k on, and the new v alues will b e u sed. The system resets and runs the p o w er-up self test. 4 D 5 Exits the Conîguration Mo de and stores t he factory d efault v alues in the EEPR OM. Y ou m ust cycle con troller p o w er to reconîgure the in terfaces to these default v alues. 4 A 5 Causes the Bo ot R OM to reset and run the p o w er-up s elf-test without sa ving an y c hanges y ou ma y ha v e made to the in terface v alues. The pre-existing v alues will b e used. En ter y our r esp onse follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 after the ? prompt. If y ou decide to use the default c onîgurations, exit the m en ub y p ressing D follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . Configuring the Boot ROM A-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A Configuring for Automatic Operating System Selection Y ou will probably w an t to lea v e this feature in its default setting unless an yo f the follo wing applies: Tw oo r more op erating systems are a v ailable on y our con troller Y our w orkstation is connected to a net w ork that con tains m ultiple serv ers. Y ou need to b e able to auto b oo t from a diîeren t op erating system from that used b y other no des. If an y of these conditions is true, follo w these steps to en ter and use Auto System Selection: A-6 Configuring the Boot ROM
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A 1 With Conîguration Con trol men u in the upp er-righ t corner of the screen, en ter 2 4 Return 5 . Configuration Control Keys Control Class ----------------------------- 1 I/O Configuration 2 Auto System Selection A Abort without changes ---------------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? 2 This men ua p p ears: Auto System S election Keys Option Status ---------------------------- 1 Scan for System Y 2 Selected System N 3 Store Selected Sys. N E Execute A Abort without changes ----------------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? 3 The prompt ? indicates that y our con troller is w aiting for a letter or n um b er input. The Auto System Selection men u indicates the w a y y our system is curren tly set. T oggling the \Status" o ptions b y en tering one of the n um b ers under \Keys" on the left will result in a new conîguration whic h will be executed as so on as y ou press E .A t t hat p o in t t he system resets and runs the p o w er-up s elf test. F or example, if y our disks c on tain more than one o p e rating system, y ou could c ho ose o ne as the S elected System b y p ressing 2 , f ollo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . Configuring the Boot ROM A-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A 4 The Auto System Selection men u c hanges to indicate N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Selected System , N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN Scan for System , and N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N Store Selected Sys. are all Y (\y es"). Auto System Selection Keys Option Status ---------------------------- 1 Scan for System Y 2 Selected System Y 3 Store Selected Sys. Y E Execute A Abort w ithout changes ----------------------------- Type [key] RETURN ? 5 T o execute the men u as it app ears in the previous step, press E , follo w ed b y 4 Return 5 . The system will giv e y ou the opp ortunit y to iden tify the \Selected System" in the next step. If y ou decide not to c hange the Auto System Selection conîguration, press A to lea v e the conîguration unc hanged. The system resets and r uns the p o w er-up self test. 6 If y ou pressed E , the system resets and runs the p o w er-up self test. Y our p o w er-up displa y will c hange, and the a v ailable op erating systems w ould b e listed in the upp er righ t-hand corner lik e this: Copyright 1991 :(device, select code/address, unit) Hewlett-Packard Company 1H SYSTEM_HPUX All Rights Reserved (other systems) BOOTROM Rev. 3.01 2 MAY 91 MC68040 Processor Configuration EEPROM HP-HIL.Keyboard A-8 Configuring the Boot ROM
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n A 7 The n um b er-letter designation for the op erating system y ou will select is 1H . En ter that preîx b y t yping 1H 4 Return 5 . That op erating system will b o ot. If y ou do not en ter this information, the Bo ot R OM will designate the îrst system it scans as the \Selected System". If y ou previously set the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NN NN NN NN N N N N Store Selected Sys. option to \y es," the op erating system selected will b e the one to automatically b o ot eac h time y ou turn on y our con troller. This completes the selection pro cess, and the system will no w pro ceed w ith b o oting the selected system for this and future sessions. For More Information See \In terpreting Error Messages D uring Bo ot" Chapter 7 for additional guidance if y ou exp erience problems during this pro cess. Configuring the Boot ROM A-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary Glossary absolute path name The name of a île whic h lists all the directories leading to it, starting with ro ot (\/") and ending with the île base name itself. If the path name indicates a dir e ctory , lea v et h e trailing s lash. F or example, /users/jth/ . access p ermissions File name c haracteristics (including r e ad, write , and exe cute ) whic h determine whether a pro cess can p erform a requested op eration on the île (suc h as op ening a île for writing). Access p ermissions can b e c hanged b y a chmo d (1) command. activ ate In SAM or HP VUE, to cause a g raphical con trol, suc h as N N N N N N N N OK to tak e eîect b y clic king the mouse while t he p oin ter is o v er that con trol, or, on a c haracter terminal, b y illuminating the con trol (using arro w k eys, etc.) and pressing 4 Return 5 . activ e windo w The windo w in whic hk eyb oard input a pp ears. Only one windo w can b e activ e at a time. The activ e windo w is said to ha v e the k eyb oard fo cus. application A program used t o p erform a p articular task, usually in teractiv ely ,s u c ha s computer-aided design, text editing, or accoun ting. argumen t The p art o f a command line w hic hi d e n tiîes what (île, directory , e tc.) is to be acted u p o n. Glossary-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary ARP A/Berk eley host name A system name assigned to eac h system that supp orts ARP A services. ASCI I American Sym b olic Co de for Information In terc hange bac kground pro cess A p rogram, usually l o w p riorit y , run non-in teractiv ely b y the shell without terminal I/O, while other pro cessing o ccupies the terminal. The \&" at the end of a command line causes that command to be run a s ab a c kground pro cess. bac kup Ac o p yo f all or part o f the île system. bit BInary digiT b o ot T o start or activ ate a system. b oo t R OM A read-only memory whic h is incorp orated in to a terminal for the purp ose starting the op erating system, testing the terminal, and pro ducing a standard displa y . Bourne Shell A command in terpreter, in v ok ed as /bin/sh . The Bourne Shell is the default shell in HP-UX. BSD Berk eley Soft w are Distribution. bus address An um be r w h i c h mak es up part of the a ddress HP-UX u ses to lo cate a particular d evice. The bus address is determined b y a switc h setting on a p eripheral device w hic h a llo w s t he computer to distinguish b e t w een t w o devices connected t o t he same in terface. Glossary-2
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary button A graphic elemen t in a displa y that functionally represen ts an actual push button. It is usually a ccessible b y mouse p oin ter and is used to start an action. C A standardized and highly-p ortable computer language. Also the name of the NLS default language/en vironmen t (formerly n-computer). Also the name of one of the HP-UX command in terpreters, the C Shell ( csh ). CD-R OM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory . CD R OM île system A read-only memory île system on compact disk. T ypically , y ou can r ead data from a CD R OM île system, but y ou cannot write to one. c haracter An elemen t used for the organization, con trol, or represen tation of text. Characters include graphic c haracters and con trol c haracters. c ho ose In HP VUE or SAM, to cause a selection to tak e eîect, b y clic king on it t wice or b y pressing return with the selection illuminated. clic k T o press and r ele ase a mouse button rapidly . cluster A group of w orkstations connected via a LAN. One computer, the cluster serv er , p e rforms as a île-system serv er for the cluster clien ts . (F or information on clusters, see Managing Clusters of HP9000 Computers: Sharing the HP-UX Filing System ). cluster clien t A cluster n o d e t hat do es not ha v e a lo cal H P-UX île system. Its î le system resides o n the cluster serv er. Ho w ev er for HP-UX 8.0, cluster clien ts can ha v e l o cally moun ted disks for lo cal d ata s torage. A clien t can also refer to an y pro cess r un b y a serv er. Glossary-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary cluster no de An y w orkstation net w ork ed in to an HP-UX cluster. (Also called \cno de".) cluster serv er The cluster no de whic h acts as aî l e system serv er and op erating system serv er for all the cluster n o des in an HP-UX cluster. Also called cluster ro ot serv er . cno de Abbreviation for cluster no de . CPU Cen tral Pro cessing Unit. The instruction-pro cessing mo dule of the computer. Se e also SPU . cron A pro cess whic h executes commands at sp eciîed dates and times. C Shell An HP-UX command in terpreter, in v ok ed as csh . curren t session The HP-UX o r HP VUE session to whic h y ou are logged in at a particular time. curren t w orking directory The directory in whic h relativ e path name searc hes b egin. It is also c alled the \curren t directory" or \w orking directory", and is iden tiîed b y en tering the command pwd . device île A île used for the computer to comm unicate with a device suc h as a tap e driv e o r a prin ter. DDS Digital Data Storage. HP-supp orted \ D A T" format for data storage. dialog b o x A sub windo w o f a n a pplication used to request information, o r t o d ispla y status or error c onditions. Glossary-4
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary DIO Device input/output. directory A table of iden tiîers and references (suc ha s île n ames) that refer to corresp o nding îles and items of data. Used in a t ypical HP-UX organizational structure to pro vide an organizational and logical iden tit y for a giv en group of îles and directories. In HP VUE, a directory i s sometimes called a \ folder." double clic k Pressing and releasing a mouse button t wice in rapid succession. F or HP VUE, \double clic k" an icon. drag Pressing and holding do wn a mouse button while mo ving the mouse po i n ter. drop Releasing an icon that has b een \dragged" to a new p osition b y release the mouse button. en vironmen t The set of deîned shell v ariables (some of whic ha r e P A TH, TERM, SHELL, HOME) that deîne the conditions under whic h y our commands run. These conditions can i nclude y our terminal c haracteristics, home directory , and default searc h path. expander In terface hardw are for additional DIO cards. One or t w o expander b o xes can be stac k ed on top o f a system unit and connected directly to it or to another expander on whic h it is placed. île access p ermissions File name c haracteristics (including r e ad, w rite ,a n d exe cute ) whic h determine whether a pro c ess c an p erform a r equested op eration on the î le (suc h a s o p e ning a î le for w riting). Access p e rmissions can b e c hanged b ya chmo d (1) c ommand. Glossary-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary File Manager The HP VUE comp onen t that allo ws y ou to manipulate y our î les and directories, or to set t he format and b eha vior of HP VUE. îleset Describ es a logically-deîned, named set o f îles on an up date or installation tap e. île system The organization of îles on a giv en storage device, p ossibly including hierarc hical directories. foreground pro cess The pro cess o ccup ying the c urren tly activ e terminal I/O, whic h ma y b e a windo w. The shell will not return a prompt un til a foreground pro cess has înished executing. F ron t P anel The windo w area of a default HP VUE screen whic h con tains some accessories, suc h as the clo c k, and the con trol buttons for activ ating v arious functions of the w orkspace manager program, suc h as prin t, terminal, st yle manager, and trash. group An asso ciation of users who are all p ermitted to access the same set of îles. The mem b ers of ag r o u p are deîned in the îles /etc/passwd , /etc/group , and /etc/logingroup (if it exists) via an umerical group ID. U sers with iden tical group IDs are mem b ers of the same group. group access list The group access list i s as e t of supplemen tary group IDs, asso ciated with a pro cess, used in determining resource accessibilit y . $HOME The v alue of the e n vironmen tv ariable represen ting t he home directory . home directory The directory name giv en b y the v alue of the s hell v ariable HOME. This i s the directory where the user starts a fter logging in, t ypically /users/ lo gin , where lo gin is y our l ogin name. Glossary-6
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary home session An HP VUE user-conîgured default session. Unless y ou sp ecify otherwise, the home session is restored eac h time y ou log in. host name Refers to a string whic h uniquely iden tiîes a system in a net w ork. There are generally diîeren t host name domains asso ciated with diîeren t net w orks. HP-HIL Hewlett-P ac k ard Human In terface Link. HP-IB Hewlett-P ac k ard In terface Bus (IEEE 488 standard). HP-UX cluster A group of w orkstations connected via a LAN. One computer, the cluster serv er , p e rforms as a île-system serv er for the cluster clien t . Cluster can also b e used b y itself if the con text is clear. \Diskless cluster" should not b e used. HP VUE HP Visual User En vironmen t. icon A miniaturized graphic represen tation of a windo w in the w orkspace (t ypically an application windo w). Pro cesses executing in a windo w con tin ue to execute when the windo w is iconiîed. IEEE Institute of Electrical and E lectronics Engineers, and the in terface format whic h b ears its name. ITE The I n ternal T erminal Em ulator program, w hic h allo ws a b it-mapp e d displa y t o f unction a s a standard computer terminal. k ernel The p art o f t he HP-UX o p e rating system t hat i s resp onsible for managing the c omputer's r esources. Glossary-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary k eysh The command for in v oking a Key Shell. Key Shell An HP-UX shell whic h, as an extension of the Korn Shell, uses hierarc hical softk ey men us and con text-sensitiv e help to aid users in building command lines. In v ok ed as usr/bin/keysh . Korn Shell An HP-UX shell, featuring command history recall and line-editing. In v ok ed as /bin/ksh . LAN Se e Lo cal Area Net w ork . LANG An NLS en vironmen t v ariable that is used to inform a computer pro cess of the user's requiremen ts for \native language," \lo cal customs," and \co ded c haracter set." This v ariable can b e set at login b y clic king on the N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Options men u in the HP VUE Login screen. LED Ligh t-emitting dio de. Lo cal Area Net w ork The systems and/or clusters whic h share data, hardw are, and s oft w are resources via Net w orking Services soft w are. lo cally-moun ted île system A île system moun ted on a disk attac hed to a cluster clien t and shared b y other no des in the cluster. login Y our login n ame, the n ame b y whic hy ou are k no wn to the w orkstation. This ma yb e a n y g roup of c haracters, so long as it meets system rules. maximize The function of enlarging a w indo w t o its largest size. OSF/Motif windo w managers, s uc h a s the HP VUE W orkspace M anager, pro vide this function. A lso se e minimize and restore . Glossary-8
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary men u bar An area at the top of a windo w that con tains the p ull do wn men us for that application. minimize The function o f reducing a windo w to an icon. OSF/Motif windo w managers|suc h as the HP VUE W orkspace Manager|pro vide this function. A lso se e restore . mnemonic A single c haracter used as a k eyb oard shortcut for a SAM or VUE command. Usually , a command's mnemonic is its initial letter. The screen indicates a mnemonic c haracter b y u nderlining or illuminating the c haracter. moun t T o add a n auxiliary (remo v able) île system to an activ e existing île system. moun t directory The directory in an existing île system that is the ro ot directory of a moun ted auxiliary île system. m ultiuser state The condition of the HP-UX op erating system in whic ht h e cluster no des (and console) allo w comm unication b et w een the system and all its users. Nativ e Language Supp ort (NLS) A feature o f HP-UX t hat pro vides the user with in ternationalized soft w are and the application programmer with to ols to dev elop this soft w are. NFS Net w ork File Services. NFS île s ystem A î le system accessible o v er a n et w ork via the N FS Services pro duct. no de name A unique s tring u sed to iden tify e ac h n o d e i n a cluster. Glossary-9
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary op erating system The con ten ts of /hp-ux , including the k ernel, commands, input-output con trol, system accoun ting, storage a ssignmen t, and other services. A lso se e k ernel . OSF Op en Soft w are F oundation. o wner The o wner of a île is usually the creator of that île. Ho w ev er, the o wnership of a île can b ec hanged b y the sup eruser or the curren t o wner with the chown(1) command or the chown(2) system call. paren t pro cess ID A paren t pro cess iden tiîcation. A lso se e PID . passw ord An encrypted sequence of c haracters used b y HP-UX to iden tify an authorized user and to p ermit authorized login on a system. path name (Tw o w ords, except as an italicized argumen t, p athname .) A sequence of directory names, separated b y slashes, whic h sp ecify the lo cation of an y île or directory . PID Pro c ess iden tit y (n um b er). p op-up men u A men u that remains in visible un til a user action or some condition in the program causes t he men u to displa y . T ypically the user either presses the \men u button" on the mouse (a common default is button 3), o r presses the \men uk ey" on the k eyb oard (a common default is F10). POSIX POrtable Systems I n terface ( for U N*X). U N*X s tandard from IEEE. P osix Shell POSIX-complian tv ersion of the Korn Shell. Glossary-10
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary ppid P aren t pro cess ID. pro cess An in v o cation of a program. Generally , pro c ess refers to a p rogram running in memory , while program is the co de stored on disk. pro c ess ID A unique iden tiîcation n um b er assigned to all pro cesses b y the op erating system. A lso se e PID. pt y Pseudo-terminal. RAM random-access memory . regular expression A string of c haracters that selects text. relativ e path name The name of a île, listing all the directories leading to that île in relation to the curren t w orking directory . restore The function of returning a windo w to its n ormal size from a maximize d or minimize d state. OSF/Motif windo w managers, suc h as the HP VUE W orkspace M anager, pro vide this function. Se e minimize and maximize . R OM read-only memory . ro ot directory The highest l ev el directory of the hierarc hical î le system, from whic h all other îles branc h. In HP-UX, the s lash ( / )c haracter refers to the \ ro ot directory ." The ro ot directory i s t he only directory in the île s ystem t hat is its o wn \paren t d irectory ." Glossary-11
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary ro ot île system The île system moun ted on the cluster serv er. ro ot serv er The no de in a cluster to whic ht h e storage device con taining the r o ot île system of the cluster is ph ysically attac hed. A lso cluster serv er . ro ot user The user with ro ot p ermission, ha ving a separate \ro ot" accoun t and passw ord, and w orking with the Bourne Shell, as the default shell. run-lev el The system state determined at b o ot whic h deînes, among other things, m ulti- or single-user status. SAM System Administration Manager. A subsystem of HP-UX that helps y ou to do a wide range o f system administration tasks in teractiv ely . script A île that con tains commands that a shell can in terpret and run. scroll bar In graphical in terfaces, a graphical device used to scroll data displa y ed in a windo w. A scroll bar consists of a slider, scroll area, and scroll arro ws. SCSI Small Computer System In terface. select In HP VUE or SAM, to illuminate an item in a form or men ub y using the mouse p oin ter and clic king on the item, or, on a c haracter terminal, b y mo ving the i lluminated area using the a rro wk eys, etc. serv er A c omputer p rogram that pro vides île access, login access, île transfer, prin ting and other services across a net w ork. Sometimes, but n ot alw a ys, a serv er consists o f a dedicated computer. Glossary-12
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary session The time b et w een logging in and logging out. shell An HP-UX command in terpreter (Bourne, Korn, Key ,P osix or C), pro viding a w orking en vironmen t in terface for the user. The shell tak es command input from the k eyb oard and in terprets it for the op erating system. shell script A île that con tains commands that a shell can in terpret and run. Also \shell program." sh ut do wn T o tak e the system from m ulti-user state to a s tate in whic h no pro cesses are running, using the shutdown command. single-user state The state of a computer where there is little or no pro cess activit y and no users logged in. The system is only accessible to the curren t system administrator (ro o t). This mo de is brough t ab out b y execution of shutdown (1). Also called single-user mo de . SPU System Pro cessing Unit. The instruction-pro cessing mo dule of the computer. standalone A computer whic h is not part of a cluster. standard error The destination of error and sp ecial messages from a program, in tended to b e used for diagnostic messages. The s tandard error output is often called stderr , and i s automatically o p e ned b y t he shell for writing o n î le descriptor 2 for e v ery c ommand in v ok ed. S tandard e rror usually a pp ears on the d ispla y u nless i t i s d irected otherwise. standard i nput The s ource of input data for a p rogram. The s tandard input île is often Glossary-13
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary called stdin , and is automatically op ened b y the shell for reading on île descriptor 0 for ev ery command in v ok ed. standard output The destination of output data from a program. The standard output île is often called stdout ,a n d is automatically op ened b y the shell for writing on île descriptor 1 for ev ery command in v ok ed. Standard output app ears on the displa y unless it is redirected otherwise. SU Sup er User. Se e ro ot user . system name The eigh t-c haracter (or l ess) string whic h uniquely iden tiîes a system. Usually iden tical with the system's host name found in /etc/hosts .T h e In ternet Proto col (IP) n um b er is sometimes used instead of a system name to iden tify the system. timeout Deactiv ation of a device or system after a pre-set time. title bar The rectangular area at the top of a windo w that con tains the title of the windo w (for example, \T erminal Windo w" or \File M anager"). In OSF/Motif windo w managers, suc h as the HP VUE W orkspace Manager, the title bar can a lso be used with the mouse p oin ter to mo v e (\drag") the windo w to a new lo cation. Also called \men u bar". T o olb o x A sp ecial HP VUE File Manager view for managing applications and other soft w are. Sub-t yp es of to olb o xes accessed with the T oo l b o x slideup panel are: P ersonal, General, Net w ork, and M ark etplace. tree structure The HP-UX metho d of organizing îles and d irectories in to a h ierarc hical structure. This structure l o oks lik e a n i n v erted tree with the \ro ot" directory at the t op, d escending in to m ultiple directory/île branc hes that end in clusters of îles. Glossary-14
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Glossary uid User ID. user An y p erson who in teracts directly with a computer system. user in terface The m edium through w hic h u sers comm unicate with their w orkstations. The command-line prompt is one t yp e of in terface. The graphical ob jects of HP VUE are another t yp e of in terface. user ID An in teger whic h iden tiîes eac h system user. VUE Visual User En vironmen t. windo w A f rame-deîned, rectangular area of the screen used b y the HP VUE to con tain a particular application or a command l ine. Clien t applications can ha v e m ultiple windo ws. windo w men u The men u in the upp er-left corner of an HP VUE windo w frame. w orking directory This is the directory in whic h relativ e path name searc hes b egin. It is also called the curren t d irectory , or the curren t w orking directory . w orkspace The en tire area of the displa y screen when HP VUE starts u p. T o switc h from one w orkspace to another, y ou c ho ose the corresp onding w orkspace button in the F ron tP anel. w orkstation A îexible, graphics-orien ted c omputer, generally h igh-sp eed a nd high-capacit y , d esigned for u se in a v ariet y of industrial s ituations. Glossary-15
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index Index 3 382 features built-in in terfaces, 1-3 general, 1-1 graphics, 1-3 hardw are arc hitecture, 1-7 HP-HIL in terface, 1-6 HP P arallel p ort, 1-6 HP-UX op erating systems, 1-8 in ternal mass storage, 1-7 k eyb oard, 1-6 LAN, 1-6 memory, 1-3 RS-232 in terface, 1-6 SCSI in terface, 1-6 supp orted in ternal mass storage devices, 1-7 supp orted monitors, 1-3 A arc hiving, 5-2 , 6-15 automatic system selection, A-6 B bac king u p, 5-2 {12 DDS tap e , 5 -2 îexible disk, 6-15 imp ortance of, 7-14 restoring data, 5-7 bac kups, 7-18 restoring data, 5-8 Basic do cumen ts, 2 -3 /bin/ksh , 4-4 /bin/posix/sh , 4-4 /bin/sh , 4-4 b o oting en tering information, 3-2 b o oting from LAN, 7-11 b o ot problems, 7-10 b o ot program, 7-10 Bo ot R OM conîguration men u, A-5 conîguration men u , A-6 conîguring, A-2 , A-4 error messages, 7-2 information, 2-3 in terface defaults, A-4 startup information, 3-2 Bourne Shell, 4-3 , 4-5 bus IDs determining activ e SCSI, 6-7 C cables, 7-16 CD R OM as system bac kup, 5-2 installing, 6-18 {23 moun ting, 6 -21 SCSI bus a ddress, 6 -18 testing i nstallation, 6-21 Cen tronics p ort, 1-6 c hanging a passw ord, 3-7 c hanging y our shell, 4-5 chsh ,4 - 5 Index-1
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index command line logging in, 3-3 new user accoun t, 3-5 prompt, 4-2 setting passw ord, 3-3 sh utting d o wn, 3-11 using, 3-3 , 4-1 commands chsh , 4-5 cp ,4 - 9 diskinfo , 6-14 echo , 4-4 exit , 3-10 , 4-5 , 4-23 fsck , 7-15 , 7-17 , 7-18 ftp , 4-17 , 4-18 , 4-20 ioscan , 6-14 lock , 3-10 lp , 4-12 lsf , 4-8 man , 4-7 mkdir , 4-8 mkrs , 5-2 , 5-3 , 5-4 more , 4-12 mount , 6-16 , 6-17 , 6-21 mv , 4-9 passwd , 3-7 , 3-8 rcp , 4-17 , 4-20 , 4-21 , 4-22 reboot , 7-17 , 7-18 reboot , -n option, 7-17 , 7-18 rlogin , 4-17 , 4-23 rm , 4-10 rm -rf dirname , 4-11 shutdown , 3-11 umount , 6-17 , 6 -22 whoami , 4-2 conîguration Bo ot R OM, A -4 conîguring Bo ot R OM, A -2 Bo ot R OM men u, A-3 CD R OM, 6-18 {23 DDS driv e, 6-24 {27 îexible disk driv e, 6-12 hard disk driv e jump ers, 6-8 HP-UX for a hard disk driv e, 6-8 prin ter f or HP-UX, 6-3 connectors, 1-3 Con text Dep enden t Files /hp-ux , 7 -12 con troller installation do cumen ts, 2-2 op erating tasks, 2-4 cop y remotely, 4-18 , 4-19 , 4-21 , 4-22 core dumps, 7-18 correcting t yping mistak es with 4 Back space 5 , 4-2 cp , 4-9 crash reco v ery b o ot from reco v ery tap e, 5-10 creating a reco v ery system, 5-2 creating directories with mkdir ,4 - 8 C shell, 4-3 D data protecting, 5-2 restoring individual îles, 5-7 DDS driv e conîguring, 6-24 {27 LEDs, 6-28 DDS tap e cautions, 6-30 maxim um usage, 6-30 reco v ery systems, 5 -2 deînitions, t erms, G lossary-1 {15 deleting a î le with rm , 4 -10 determining a ctiv e b us IDs, 6-7 device address, 7-12 diagnostic i ndicators, 7-5 directories creating sub-directories, 4-8 Index-2
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index listing with lsf , 4-8 mo ving and cop ying îles with mv and cp , 4-9 disc caddies, 6-19 disk driv e (CD R OM) installation, 6-18 {23 disk driv e (îexible) installation, 6-12 {17 disk driv e (hard) installation, 6-8 { 11 diskinfo , 6-11 , 6-14 , 6-21 disk storage, 1-7 DISPLAY en vironmen t v ariable, 4-24 displa ying windo ws remotely, 4-24 driv es installing, 6-8 {30 E echo , 4-4 editing a île information, 2-4 pro cedure, 4-14 editing functions, 4-14 ejecting a îexible disk, 6-17 en vironmen t v ariable DISPLA Y, 4-24 en vironmen t v ariables SHELL , 4-4 error messages b o ot, 7-2 errors b oo t problems, 7-10 LED indications, 7-5 etc/checklist , e diting, 6 -16 , 6-21 /etc/clusterconf , 7 -11 /etc/hosts , 4 -18 , 4-20 exit , 4-5 exit command, 3-10 exiting for an extended p e rio d, 3-10 exiting temp orarily ( command line), 3-10 F Fail-safe Session HP VUE, 7-8 îles cop ying b et w een directories, 4-9 core , 7-18 /etc/clusterconf , 7-12 mo ving b et w een d irectories, 4-9 prin ting, 4-12 remo ving with rm , 4-10 viewing con ten ts of, 4-12 îles and directories, 4-8 île system bac king up, 5-4 restoring, 5-10 system panic, 7-17 île system arc hiving, 5-2 îexible disk bac king up îles, 6-15 inserting, 6-17 moun ting, 6-16 remo ving, 6-17 retrieving îles, 6-15 testing installation, 6-14 îexible disk driv e, 6-12 {17 installing, 6-12 îopp y (îexible) disk driv e, 6-12 fsck , 7-15 ftp , 4-17 , 4-18 île manipulation, 4-20 G getty , 3 -11 H hard disk installing, 6-8 testing i nstallation, 6 -11 hard disk driv e conîguration, 6 -8 Index-3
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index hardw are failure at b o ot, 7-10 , 7-16 failure of p eripheral, 7-16 hardw are address, 7-11 $HOME/.rhosts ,4 - 2 0 HP-UX command line, 4 -2 {24 using, 4-2 {24 HP VUE activ ating, 3-12 ,3 - 1 3 c hec king error logs, 7-7 problems, 7-7 using, 3-12 I indicators, 7-4 information, înding, 2-2 {4 inserting a CD R OM, 6-19 , 6-22 inserting a îexible disk, 6-17 installation man uals, 2-2 installation man uals, 2-3 HP BASIC, 2-3 HP-UX, 2-3 installing CD R OM, 6-18 {23 DDS driv e, 6-24 {27 îexible disk driv e, 6-12 {17 hard disk driv e, 6-8 preparing for, 6-2 installing a îexible disk driv e, 6-12 in terfaces built in, 1-6 HP-HIL , 1-6 LAN, 1-6 RS-232, 1-6 ioscan , 6 -14 J jump er connections hard disk (factory), 6-8 K k ernel selection, 7-11 k eyb oard installation do cumen ts, 2-2 Key Shell, 4-3 , 4-6 Korn Shell, 4-3 , 4-5 L LAN problems with, 7-17 system panic, 7-17 LED indicators, 7-4 diagnostic, 7-5 logging in command line, 3-3 HP VUE, help, 3-14 problems, 7-8 when all else fails, 7-8 without windo ws, 7-8 logging out of a remote system, 4-23 log in on a remote system rlogin , 4-23 login shell, 4-5 lo oking at a île's con ten ts with more , 4-12 lp , 4-12 lsf , 4-8 M man , 4-7 manipulate îles remotely ftp , 4-20 man pages, 4-7 man uals for s p e ciîc languages, 2 -3 for s p e ciîc tasks, 2-2 ,2 - 3 sp eciîc tasks, 2-4 mkdir ,4 - 8 mkrs , 5-2 , 5-3 ,5 - 4 device îles, 5 -4 Index-4
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index errors, 5-4 monitor installation do cumen ts, 2-2 more , 4-12 mount , 6-16 , 6-17 , 6-21 , 6 -22 moun ting a CD R OM, 6-21 , 6 -22 moun ting a disk, 6-17 moun ting a îexible disk, 6-16 mouse installation do cumen ts, 2 -2 mv , 4-9 N net w ork installation do cumen ts, 2-2 In ternet Proto col, en tering, 2-4 op eration, 2-4 net w ork cop ying ftp , 4-18 net w ork IP n um b er do cumen ts for en tering, 2-3 net w ork problems, 7-20 new user accoun t, 3-5 NFS île system reco v ery using SAM, 5-7 No Windows VUE option, 3-11 O op erating systems, supp orted, 1-8 op erating tasks do cumen ts, 2-4 Options men u, 7-8 P panic message, 7-16 panic,system, 7-14 P ascal d o cumen ts, 2 -3 passwd command, 3 -7 passw ord selecting, 3 -7 p e ripherals disk driv e, 6-9 p orts A UI LAN, 1-6 HP P arallel, 1-6 IEEE, 1-6 LAN, 1-6 ThinLAN, 1-6 P osix Shell, 4-3 p o w ering d o wn, 3 -11 pre-installed systems, 3-2 preparing for installation, 6-2 prin ter installing using SAM, 6-3 testing installation, 6-5 troublesho oting, 6-6 prin ting a île lp , 4-12 problems b o oting from LAN, 7-11 can't înd k ernel, 7-12 net w ork, 7-20 prin ter, 6-6 secondary loader, 7-11 system b o ot, 7-10 , 7-17 with hardw are, 7-16 pro d uct description, 1-1 prompt, command line, 4-2 R rbootd daemon, 7-12 rcp , 4-17 , 4-20 , 4 -21 , 4 -22 reco v ery systems, 5-2 remotely c op ying a d irectory, 4-20 remotely c op ying a î le, 4-20 remo ving CD R OM, 6 -22 directory a nd con ten ts, 4 -11 îexible disk, 6-17 remo ving a î le with rm , 4 -10 restoring, 5-2 restoring île system, 5-10 {12 Index-5
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index restoring individual îles, 5-7 {9 restoring op erating system, 5-10 {12 restricted shells, 4-4 retrieving îles, 6-15 .rhosts , 4 -20 , 4-21 , 4 -23 rlogin , 4 -17 ,4 - 2 3 rm , 4-10 , 4-11 rm -rf , 4-11 running commands, 4-2 S SAM bac king up with, 5-2 , 5-4 new u ser accoun t, 3-5 SCSI bus address înding existing, 6-7 SCSI bus IDs determining activ e, 6-7 scsi device île, 6-8 secondary loader problems, 7-11 secondary loader program, 7-10 , 7-11 set_parms , 3-2 setting a passw ord, 3-7 SHELL en vironmen t v ariable, 4-4 shells, 4-3 c hanging y our shell, 4-5 default prompt, 4-4 do cumen ts for u sing, 2-4 features compared, 4-4 île names, 4-4 Shel ls: User's Guide , 4-7 starting a s ystem, 3-2 starting HP VUE, 3-12 system op erating t asks, 2 -4 system information , 3-2 system panic core dumps, 7-18 hardw are failure, 7-16 LAN, 7-17 reco v ering from, 7 -14 system reco v ery, 5-10 system securit y, 3-7 , 3-8 T telinit , 3-11 terms, deînitions, Glossary-1 {15 testing installation CD R OM, 6-21 testing installation (îexible disk), 6-14 testing installation (hard disk), 6-11 troublesho oting system panic, 7-14 {19 t yping commands, 4-2 U umount , 6-17 unmoun ting a CD R OM, 6-22 unmoun ting a disk, 6-17 un used SCSI bus address înding ,6 - 7 user accoun t, 3-5 user name, 4-5 using DDS driv e, 6-28 V vi , 4-14 {16 basic editing functions, 4-14 cursor mo v emen t, 4-15 do cumen ts, 4-16 quitting, 4-15 sa ving do cumen ts, 4-15 viewing a île information, 2-4 viewing a île w ith more , 4 -12 VUE ( HP VUE) activ ating, 3 -12 , 3 -13 W whoami ,4 - 2 Index-6
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n Index X xterm windo w, 3-12 X W indo w System activ ating, 3-12 information, 2-4 Index-7
FINAL TRIM SIZE : 7.5 i n x 9.0 i n